1gm(1)                       General Commands Manual                      gm(1)
2
3
4
5       NAME
6
7              gm  - command-line utility to create, edit, compare, convert, or
8              display images
9
10

SYNOPSIS

12       gm animate [ options ... ] file [ [ options ... ] file ... ]
13
14       gm batch [ options ... ] [ script ]
15
16       gm benchmark [ options ... ] subcommand
17
18       gm compare [ options ... ] reference-image [ options ... ]  compare-im‐
19       age [ options ... ]
20
21       gm  composite  [  options  ... ] change-image base-image [ mask-image ]
22       output-image
23
24       gm conjure [ options ] script.msl [ [ options ] script.msl ]
25
26       gm convert [ [ options ... ] [ input-file ...  ] [ options ... ] ] out‐
27       put-file
28
29       gm display [ options ... ] file ...  [ [options ... ]file ... ]
30
31       gm identify file [ file ... ]
32
33       gm import [ options ... ] file
34
35       gm mogrify [ options ... ] file ...
36
37       gm  montage  [  options ... ] file [ [ options ... ] file ... ] output-
38       file
39
40       gm time subcommand
41
42       gm version
43

DESCRIPTION

45       GraphicsMagick's gm provides a suite of utilities for creating, compar‐
46       ing,  converting, editing, and displaying images.  All of the utilities
47       are provided as sub-commands of a single gm executable.   The  gm  exe‐
48       cutable  returns  the exit code 0 to indicate success, or 1 to indicate
49       failure:
50
51       animate displays an animation (e.g. a GIF file) on any workstation dis‐
52       play running an X server.
53
54       batch  executes  an  arbitary number of the utility commands (e.g. con‐
55       vert) in the form of a simple linear batch script in order  to  improve
56       execution  efficiency,  and/or to allow use as a subordinate co-process
57       under the control of an arbitrary script or program.
58
59       benchmark executes one of the other utility commands (e.g. convert) for
60       a specified number of iterations, or execution time, and reports execu‐
61       tion time and other profiling  information  such  as  CPU  utilization.
62       Benchmark provides various operating modes including executing the com‐
63       mand with a varying number of threads, and alternate reporting  formats
64       such as comma-separated value (CSV).
65
66       compare compares two images and reports difference statistics according
67       to specified metrics and/or outputs an image with a visual  representa‐
68       tion  of  the  differences.   It may also be used to test if images are
69       similar within a particular range and  specified  metric,  returning  a
70       truth value to the executing environment.
71
72       composite  composites images (blends or merges images together) to cre‐
73       ate new images.
74
75       conjure interprets and executes scripts in the  Magick  Scripting  Lan‐
76       guage (MSL).
77
78       convert converts an input file using one image format to an output file
79       with the same or differing image format  while  applying  an  arbitrary
80       number of image transformations.
81
82       display is a machine architecture independent image processing and dis‐
83       play facility. It can display an image on any workstation display  run‐
84       ning an X server.
85
86       identify  describes the format and characteristics of one or more image
87       files. It will also report if an image is incomplete or corrupt.
88
89       import reads an image from any visible window on an X server  and  out‐
90       puts  it  as an image file. You can capture a single window, the entire
91       screen, or any rectangular portion of the screen.
92
93       mogrify transforms an image or a sequence of images.  These  transforms
94       include image scaling, image rotation, color reduction, and others. The
95       transmogrified image overwrites the original image.
96
97       montage creates a composite by combining several separate  images.  The
98       images  are tiled on the composite image with the name of the image op‐
99       tionally appearing just below the individual tile.
100
101       time executes a subcommand and reports the user, system, and total exe‐
102       cution time consumed.
103
104       version  reports  the  GraphicsMagick  release version, maximum sample-
105       depth, copyright notice, supported features, and the options used while
106       building the software.
107
108       The GraphicsMagick utilities recognize the following image formats:
109
110
111       Name  Mode Description
112        o  3FR       r-- Hasselblad Photo RAW
113        o  8BIM      rw- Photoshop resource format
114        o  8BIMTEXT  rw- Photoshop resource text format
115        o  8BIMWTEXT rw- Photoshop resource wide text format
116        o  APP1      rw- Raw application information
117        o  APP1JPEG  rw- Raw JPEG binary data
118        o  ART       r-- PF1: 1st Publisher
119        o  ARW       r-- Sony Alpha DSLR RAW
120        o  AVS       rw+ AVS X image
121        o  BIE       rw- Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
122                         interchange format
123        o  BMP       rw+ Microsoft Windows bitmap image
124        o  BMP2      -w- Microsoft Windows bitmap image v2
125        o  BMP3      -w- Microsoft Windows bitmap image v3
126        o  CACHE     --- Magick Persistent Cache image format
127        o  CALS      rw- Continuous Acquisition and Life-cycle
128                         Support Type 1 image
129        o  CAPTION   r-- Caption (requires separate size info)
130        o  CIN       rw- Kodak Cineon Format
131        o  CMYK      rw- Raw cyan, magenta, yellow, and black
132                         samples (8 or 16 bits, depending on
133                         the image depth)
134        o  CMYKA     rw- Raw cyan, magenta, yellow, black, and
135                         matte samples (8 or 16 bits, depending
136                         on the image depth)
137        o  CR2       r-- Canon Photo RAW
138        o  CRW       r-- Canon Photo RAW
139        o  CUR       r-- Microsoft Cursor Icon
140        o  CUT       r-- DR Halo
141        o  DCM       r-- Digital Imaging and Communications in
142                         Medicine image
143        o  DCR       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
144        o  DCX       rw+ ZSoft IBM PC multi-page Paintbrush
145        o  DNG       r-- Adobe Digital Negative
146        o  DPS       r-- Display PostScript Interpreter
147        o  DPX       rw- Digital Moving Picture Exchange
148        o  EPDF      rw- Encapsulated Portable Document Format
149        o  EPI       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
150                         Interchange format
151        o  EPS       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
152        o  EPS2      -w- Adobe Level II Encapsulated PostScript
153        o  EPS3      -w- Adobe Level III Encapsulated PostScript
154        o  EPSF      rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
155        o  EPSI      rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript
156                         Interchange format
157        o  EPT       rw- Adobe Encapsulated PostScript with MS-DOS
158                         TIFF preview
159        o  EPT2      rw- Adobe Level II Encapsulated PostScript
160                         with MS-DOS TIFF preview
161        o  EPT3      rw- Adobe Level III Encapsulated PostScript
162                         with MS-DOS TIFF preview
163        o  EXIF      rw- Exif digital camera binary data
164        o  FAX       rw+ Group 3 FAX (Not TIFF Group3 FAX!)
165        o  FITS      rw- Flexible Image Transport System
166        o  FRACTAL   r-- Plasma fractal image
167        o  FPX       rw- FlashPix Format
168        o  GIF       rw+ CompuServe graphics interchange format
169        o  GIF87     rw- CompuServe graphics interchange format
170                         (version 87a)
171        o  GRADIENT  r-- Gradual passing from one shade to
172                         another
173        o  GRAY      rw+ Raw gray samples (8/16/32 bits,
174                         depending on the image depth)
175        o  HISTOGRAM -w- Histogram of the image
176        o  HRZ       r-- HRZ: Slow scan TV
177        o  HTML      -w- Hypertext Markup Language and a
178                         client-side image map
179        o  ICB       rw+ Truevision Targa image
180        o  ICC       rw- ICC Color Profile
181        o  ICM       rw- ICC Color Profile
182        o  ICO       r-- Microsoft icon
183        o  ICON      r-- Microsoft icon
184        o  IDENTITY  r-- Hald CLUT identity image
185        o  IMAGE     r-- GraphicsMagick Embedded Image
186        o  INFO      -w+ Image descriptive information and
187                          statistics
188        o  IPTC      rw- IPTC Newsphoto
189        o  IPTCTEXT  rw- IPTC Newsphoto text format
190        o  IPTCWTEXT rw- IPTC Newsphoto wide text format
191        o  JBG       rw+ Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
192                         interchange format
193        o  JBIG      rw+ Joint Bi-level Image experts Group
194                         interchange format
195        o  JNG       rw- JPEG Network Graphics
196        o  JP2       rw- JPEG-2000 JP2 File Format Syntax
197        o  JPC       rw- JPEG-2000 Code Stream Syntax
198        o  JPEG      rw- Joint Photographic Experts Group
199                         JFIF format
200        o  JPG       rw- Joint Photographic Experts Group
201                         JFIF format
202        o  K25       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
203        o  KDC       r-- Kodak Photo RAW
204        o  LABEL     r-- Text image format
205        o  M2V       rw+ MPEG-2 Video Stream
206        o  MAP       rw- Colormap intensities and indices
207        o  MAT       r-- MATLAB image format
208        o  MATTE     -w+ MATTE format
209        o  MIFF      rw+ Magick Image File Format
210        o  MNG       rw+ Multiple-image Network Graphics
211        o  MONO      rw- Bi-level bitmap in least-significant-
212                         -byte-first order
213        o  MPC       rw+ Magick Persistent Cache image format
214        o  MPEG      rw+ MPEG-1 Video Stream
215        o  MPG       rw+ MPEG-1 Video Stream
216        o  MRW       r-- Minolta Photo Raw
217        o  MSL       r-- Magick Scripting Language
218        o  MTV       rw+ MTV Raytracing image format
219        o  MVG       rw- Magick Vector Graphics
220        o  NEF       r-- Nikon Electronic Format
221        o  NULL      r-- Constant image of uniform color
222        o  OTB       rw- On-the-air bitmap
223        o  P7        rw+ Xv thumbnail format
224        o  PAL       rw- 16bit/pixel interleaved YUV
225        o  PALM      rw- Palm Pixmap
226        o  PBM       rw+ Portable bitmap format (black and white)
227        o  PCD       rw- Photo CD
228        o  PCDS      rw- Photo CD
229        o  PCL       -w- Page Control Language
230        o  PCT       rw- Apple Macintosh QuickDraw/PICT
231        o  PCX       rw- ZSoft IBM PC Paintbrush
232        o  PDB       rw+ Palm Database ImageViewer Format
233        o  PDF       rw+ Portable Document Format
234        o  PEF       r-- Pentax Electronic File
235        o  PFA       r-- TrueType font
236        o  PFB       r-- TrueType font
237        o  PGM       rw+ Portable graymap format (gray scale)
238        o  PGX       r-- JPEG-2000 VM Format
239        o  PICON     rw- Personal Icon
240        o  PICT      rw- Apple Macintosh QuickDraw/PICT
241        o  PIX       r-- Alias/Wavefront RLE image format
242        o  PLASMA    r-- Plasma fractal image
243        o  PNG       rw- Portable Network Graphics
244        o  PNG24     rw- Portable Network Graphics, 24 bit RGB
245                         opaque only
246        o  PNG32     rw- Portable Network Graphics, 32 bit RGBA
247                         semitransparency OK
248        o  PNG8      rw- Portable Network Graphics, 8-bit
249                         indexed, binary transparency only
250        o  PNM       rw+ Portable anymap
251        o  PPM       rw+ Portable pixmap format (color)
252        o  PREVIEW   -w- Show a preview an image enhancement,
253                         effect, or f/x
254        o  PS        rw+ Adobe PostScript
255        o  PS2       -w+ Adobe Level II PostScript
256        o  PS3       -w+ Adobe Level III PostScript
257        o  PSD       rw- Adobe Photoshop bitmap
258        o  PTIF      rw- Pyramid encoded TIFF
259        o  PWP       r-- Seattle Film Works
260        o  RAF       r-- Fuji Photo RAW
261        o  RAS       rw+ SUN Rasterfile
262        o  RGB       rw+ Raw red, green, and blue samples
263        o  RGBA      rw+ Raw red, green, blue, and matte samples
264        o  RLA       r-- Alias/Wavefront image
265        o  RLE       r-- Utah Run length encoded image
266        o  SCT       r-- Scitex HandShake
267        o  SFW       r-- Seattle Film Works
268        o  SGI       rw+ Irix RGB image
269        o  SHTML     -w- Hypertext Markup Language and a
270                         client-side image map
271        o  STEGANO   r-- Steganographic image
272        o  SUN       rw+ SUN Rasterfile
273        o  SVG       rw+ Scalable Vector Gaphics
274        o  TEXT      rw+ Raw text
275        o  TGA       rw+ Truevision Targa image
276        o  TIFF      rw+ Tagged Image File Format
277        o  TILE      r-- Tile image with a texture
278        o  TIM       r-- PSX TIM
279        o  TOPOL     r-- TOPOL X Image
280        o  TTF       r-- TrueType font
281        o  TXT       rw+ Raw text
282        o  UIL       -w- X-Motif UIL table
283        o  UYVY      rw- 16bit/pixel interleaved YUV
284        o  VDA       rw+ Truevision Targa image
285        o  VICAR     rw- VICAR rasterfile format
286        o  VID       rw+ Visual Image Directory
287        o  VIFF      rw+ Khoros Visualization image
288        o  VST       rw+ Truevision Targa image
289        o  WBMP      rw- Wireless Bitmap (level 0) image
290        o  WMF       r-- Windows Metafile
291        o  WPG       r-- Word Perfect Graphics
292        o  X         rw- X Image
293        o  X3F       r-- Foveon X3 (Sigma/Polaroid) RAW
294        o  XBM       rw- X Windows system bitmap (black
295                         and white)
296        o  XC        r-- Constant image uniform color
297        o  XCF       r-- GIMP image
298        o  XMP       rw- Adobe XML metadata
299        o  XPM       rw- X Windows system pixmap (color)
300        o  XV        rw+ Khoros Visualization image
301        o  XWD       rw- X Windows system window dump (color)
302        o  YUV       rw- CCIR 601 4:1:1 or 4:2:2 (8-bit only)
303
304           Modes:
305                     r   Read
306                     w   Write
307                     +   Multi-image
308
309
310       Support  for  some  of these formats require additional programs or li‐
311       braries.  See README in the source package for where to  find  optional
312       additional software.
313
314       Note,  a  format delineated with + means that if more than one image is
315       specified, frames are combined into a single multi-image file. Use +ad‐
316       join if you want a single image produced for each frame.
317
318       Your installation might not support all of the formats in the list.  To
319       get an accurate listing of the formats  supported  by  your  particular
320       configuration, run "gm convert -list format".
321
322       Raw  images  are  expected to have one byte per pixel unless gm is com‐
323       piled in 16-bit quantum mode or in 32-bit quantum mode. Here,  the  raw
324       data  is  expected  to  be  stored two or four bytes per pixel, respec‐
325       tively, in most-significant-byte-first order.   For  example,  you  can
326       tell  if  gm was compiled in 16-bit mode by typing "gm version" without
327       any options, and looking for "Q:16" in the first line of output.
328

FILES AND FORMATS

330       By default, the image format is determined by its magic  number,  i.e.,
331       the  first few bytes of the file. To specify a particular image format,
332       precede the filename with an image format name and a colon  (i.e.ps:im‐
333       age)  or  specify the image type as the filename suffix (i.e.image.ps).
334       The magic number takes precedence over the filename suffix and the pre‐
335       fix  takes  precedence  over  the  magic number and the suffix in input
336       files.  When a file is read, its magic number is  stored  in  the  "im‐
337       age->magick" string.  In output files, the prefix takes precedence over
338       the filename suffix, and the filename suffix takes precedence over  the
339       "image->magick" string.
340
341       To read the "built-in" formats (GRANITE, H, LOGO, NETSCAPE, PLASMA, and
342       ROSE) use a prefix (including the colon) without a filename or  suffix.
343       To read the XC format, follow the colon with a color specification.  To
344       read the CAPTION format, follow the colon with a text string or with  a
345       filename prefixed with the at symbol (@).
346
347
348       When  you  specify X as your image type, the filename has special mean‐
349       ing. It specifies an X window by id, name, or root. If no  filename  is
350       specified,  the window is selected by clicking the mouse in the desired
351       window.
352
353       Specify input_file as - for standard input, output_file as - for  stan‐
354       dard  output.   If  input_file has the extension .Z or .gz, the file is
355       uncompressed with uncompress or gunzip  respectively.   If  output_file
356       has the extension .Z or .gz, the file is compressed using with compress
357       or gzip respectively.
358
359       Use an optional index enclosed in brackets after an input file name  to
360       specify  a  desired  subimage  of  a multi-resolution image format like
361       Photo CD (e.g. "img0001.pcd[4]") or  a  range  for  MPEG  images  (e.g.
362       "video.mpg[50-75]").  A  subimage  specification  can be disjoint (e.g.
363       "image.tiff[2,7,4]"). For raw images, specify a subimage with a  geome‐
364       try  (e.g. -size 640x512 "image.rgb[320x256+50+50]").  Surround the im‐
365       age name with quotation marks to prevent your shell  from  interpreting
366       the  square  brackets.  Single images are written with the filename you
367       specify. However, multi-part images (e.g., a multi-page PostScript doc‐
368       ument  with +adjoin specified) may be written with the scene number in‐
369       cluded as part of the filename. In order to include the scene number in
370       the filename, it is necessary to include a printf-style %d format spec‐
371       ification in the file name and use the +adjoin option. For example,
372
373           image%02d.miff
374
375       writes files image00.miff, image01.miff, etc. Only a single  specifica‐
376       tion  is allowed within an output filename. If more than one specifica‐
377       tion is present, it will be ignored. It is best to embed the scene num‐
378       ber  in  the  base part of the file name, not in the extension, because
379       the extension will not be a recognizeable image type.
380
381       When running a commandline utility, you can prepend an at sign @  to  a
382       filename to read a list of image filenames from that file. This is con‐
383       venient in the event you have too many image filenames to  fit  on  the
384       command line.
385

OPTIONS

387       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
388       the command line remains in effect for the set of images that  follows,
389       until  the  set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
390       Some options only affect the decoding of images and others only the en‐
391       coding.  The latter can appear after the final group of input images.
392
393       This  is a combined list of the command-line options used by the Graph‐
394       icsMagick utilities (animate,  compare,  composite,  convert,  display,
395       identify, import, mogrify and montage).
396
397
398       In  this  document,  angle  brackets ("<>") enclose variables and curly
399       brackets ("{}") enclose optional parameters. For example, "-fuzz  <dis‐
400       tance>{%}" means you can use the option "-fuzz 10" or "-fuzz 2%".
401
402
403       -adjoin
404              join images into a single multi-image file
405
406              By  default,  all  images of an image sequence are stored in the
407              same file. However, some formats  (e.g.  JPEG)  do  not  support
408              storing more than one image per file and only the first frame in
409              an image sequence will be saved unless the result  is  saved  to
410              separate  files.  Use +adjoin to force saving multiple frames to
411              multiple numbered files. If +adjoin is  used,  then  the  output
412              filename  must  include  a printf style formatting specification
413              for the numeric part of the filename.  For example,
414
415                  image%02d.miff
416
417       -affine <matrix>
418              drawing transform matrix
419
420              This option provides a transform matrix {sx,rx,ry,sy,tx,ty}  for
421              use by subsequent -draw or -transform options.
422
423       -antialias
424              remove pixel aliasing
425
426              By default antialiasing algorithms are used when drawing objects
427              (e.g. lines) or rendering vector formats  (e.g.  WMF  and  Post‐
428              script).  Use  +antialias  to  disable use of antialiasing algo‐
429              rithms. Reasons to disable  antialiasing  include  avoiding  in‐
430              creasing colors in the image, or improving rendering speed.
431
432       -append
433              append a set of images
434
435              This option creates a single image where the images in the orig‐
436              inal set are stacked top-to-bottom.  If they are not of the same
437              width, any narrow images will be expanded to fit using the back‐
438              ground color.  Use +append to stack images  left-to-right.   The
439              set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.  If
440              the -append option appears after all of the  input  images,  all
441              images are appended.
442
443       -asc-cdl <spec>
444              apply ASC CDL color transform
445
446              Applies  ("bakes in") the ASC CDL, which is a format for the ex‐
447              change of basic primary color grading information between equip‐
448              ment  and  software from different manufacturers. The format de‐
449              fines the math for three functions:  slope,  offset  and  power.
450              Each  function  uses a number for the red, green, and blue color
451              channels for a total of nine numbers comprising a  single  color
452              decision. The tenth number (optional) is for chromiance (satura‐
453              tion) as specified by ASC CDL 1.2.
454
455              The argument string is comma delimited and is in  the  following
456              form (but without invervening spaces or line breaks)
457
458                  redslope,redoffset,redpower:
459                  greenslope,greenoffset,greenpower:
460                  blueslope,blueoffset,bluepower:
461                  saturation
462
463              with the unity (no change) specification being:
464
465                  "1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0,0.0,1.0:1.0"
466
467       -authenticate <string>
468              decrypt image with this password
469
470              Use  this option to supply a password for decrypting an image or
471              an image sequence, if it is being read from a format such as PDF
472              that  supports  encryption.   Encrypting images being written is
473              not supported.
474
475       -auto-orient
476              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
477
478              Adjusts the image orienation so that it is suitable for viewing.
479              Uses the orientation tag obtained from the image file or as sup‐
480              plied by the -orient option.
481
482       -average
483              average a set of images
484
485              The set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.
486              If  the  -average  option appears after all of the input images,
487              all images are averaged.
488
489       -backdrop
490              display the image centered on a backdrop.
491
492              This backdrop covers the entire workstation screen and is useful
493              for  hiding other X window activity while viewing the image. The
494              color of the backdrop is specified as the foreground color  (X11
495              default is black).  Refer to "X Resources", below, for details.
496
497       -background <color>
498              the background color
499
500              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
501              -fill option.
502
503       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
504              pixels below the threshold become black
505
506              Use -black-threshold to set pixels with values below the  speci‐
507              fied  threshold  to  minimum value (black). If only one value is
508              supplied, or the red, green, and blue values are identical, then
509              intensity  thresholding  is  used. If the color threshold values
510              are not identical then channel-based thresholding is  used,  and
511              color  distortion will occur. Specify a negative value (e.g. -1)
512              if you want a channel to be ignored but you do want to threshold
513              a  channel  later  in  the  list. If a percent (%) symbol is ap‐
514              pended, then the values are treated as a percentage  of  maximum
515              range.
516
517       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
518              blue chromaticity primary point
519
520       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
521              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
522
523              Blur with the given radius and standard deviation (sigma).
524
525       -border <width>x<height>
526              surround the image with a border of color
527
528              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
529
530       -bordercolor <color>
531              the border color
532
533              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
534              -fill option.
535
536       -borderwidth <geometry>
537              the border width
538
539       -box <color>
540              set the color of the annotation bounding box
541
542              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
543              -fill option.
544
545              See -draw for further details.
546
547       -channel <type>
548              the type of channel
549
550              Choose  from:  Red,  Green, Blue, Opacity, Matte, Cyan, Magenta,
551              Yellow, Black, or Gray.
552
553              Use this option to extract a particular channel from the  image.
554              Opacity,  for example, is useful for extracting the opacity val‐
555              ues from an image.
556
557       -charcoal <factor>
558              simulate a charcoal drawing
559
560       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
561              remove pixels from the interior of an image
562
563              Width and height give the number of columns and rows to  remove,
564              and  x  and y are offsets that give the location of the leftmost
565              column and topmost row to remove.
566
567              The x offset normally specifies the leftmost column  to  remove.
568              If  the  -gravity  option  is  present  with NorthEast, East, or
569              SouthEast gravity, it gives the distance leftward from the right
570              edge of the image to the rightmost column to remove.  Similarly,
571              the y offset normally specifies the topmost row to  remove,  but
572              if  the  -gravity  option  is  present with SouthWest, South, or
573              SouthEast gravity, it specifies the  distance  upward  from  the
574              bottom edge of the image to the bottom row to remove.
575
576              The  -chop option removes entire rows and columns, and moves the
577              remaining corner blocks leftward and upward to close the gaps.
578
579       -clip  apply the clipping path, if one is present
580
581              If a clipping path is present, it will be applied to  subsequent
582              operations.
583
584              For example, if you type the following command:
585
586                  gm convert -clip -negate cockatoo.tif negated.tif
587
588              only the pixels within the clipping path are negated.
589
590              The  -clip feature requires the XML library.  If the XML library
591              is not present, the option is ignored.
592
593       -coalesce
594              merge a sequence of images
595
596              Each image N in the sequence after Image 0 is replaced with  the
597              image created by flattening images 0 through N.
598
599              The set of images is terminated by the appearance of any option.
600              If the -coalesce option appears after all of the  input  images,
601              all images are coalesced.
602
603       -colorize <value>
604              colorize the image with the pen color
605
606              Specify  the amount of colorization as a percentage. You can ap‐
607              ply separate colorization values to the  red,  green,  and  blue
608              channels  of  the image with a colorization value list delimited
609              with slashes (e.g. 0/0/50).
610
611              The -colorize option may be used in conjunction  with  -modulate
612              to produce a nice sepia toned image like:
613
614                  gm convert input.ppm -modulate 115,0,100 \
615                            -colorize 7,21,50 output.ppm.
616
617       -colormap <type>
618              define the colormap type
619
620              Choose between shared or private.
621
622              This  option  only  applies  when the default X server visual is
623              PseudoColor or GRAYScale. Refer to -visual for more details.  By
624              default, a shared colormap is allocated. The image shares colors
625              with other X clients.  Some image colors could be  approximated,
626              therefore  your  image  may  look  very different than intended.
627              Choose Private and the image colors appear exactly as  they  are
628              defined.  However, other clients may go technicolor when the im‐
629              age colormap is installed.
630
631       -colors <value>
632              preferred number of colors in the image
633
634              The actual number of colors in the image may be less  than  your
635              request, but never more. Note, this is a color reduction option.
636              Images with less unique colors than specified with  this  option
637              will  have  any duplicate or unused colors removed. The ordering
638              of an existing color palette may be altered. When converting  an
639              image  from  color  to  grayscale, convert the image to the gray
640              colorspace before reducing the number of colors since  doing  so
641              is most efficient. Refer to <a href="quantize.html">quantize for
642              more details.
643
644              Note, options -dither, -colorspace, and  -treedepth  affect  the
645              color reduction algorithm.
646
647       -colorspace <value>
648              the type of colorspace
649
650              Choices  are:  CineonLog,  CMYK,  GRAY,  HSL,  HWB,  OHTA,  RGB,
651              Rec601Luma, Rec709Luma, Rec601YCbCr,  Rec709YCbCr,  Transparent,
652              XYZ, YCbCr, YIQ, YPbPr, or YUV.
653
654              Color reduction, by default, takes place in the RGB color space.
655              Empirical evidence suggests that distances in color spaces  such
656              as  YUV  or  YIQ correspond to perceptual color differences more
657              closely than do distances in RGB space.  These color spaces  may
658              give  better  results  when  color  reducing an image.  Refer to
659              quantize for more details.  Two gray colorspaces are  supported.
660              The  Rec601Luma space is based on the recommendations for legacy
661              NTSC television (ITU-R BT.601-5).  The Rec709Luma space is based
662              on  the  recommendations  for  HDTV (Rec. ITU-R BT.709-5) and is
663              suitable for use with computer graphics,  and  for  contemporary
664              CRT   displays.   The  GRAY  colorspace  currently  selects  the
665              Rec601Luma colorspace by default for backwards  compatibly  rea‐
666              sons. This default may be re-considered in the future.
667
668              Two  YCbCr  colorspaces  are supported. The Rec601YCbCr space is
669              based on the recommendations for legacy NTSC  television  (ITU-R
670              BT.601-5).  The Rec709CbCr space is based on the recommendations
671              for HDTV (Rec.  ITU-R BT.709-5) and is suitable for suitable for
672              use  with  computer graphics, and for contemporary CRT displays.
673              The YCbCr colorspace specification is equivalent toRec601YCbCr.
674
675
676              The Transparent color space behaves uniquely  in  that  it  pre‐
677              serves the matte channel of the image if it exists.
678
679              The  -colors  or  -monochrome option, or saving to a file format
680              which requires color reduction, is required for this  option  to
681              take effect.
682
683       -comment <string>
684              annotate an image with a comment
685
686              Use  this option to assign a specific comment to the image, when
687              writing to an image format that supports comments. You  can  in‐
688              clude  the  image  filename, type, width, height, or other image
689              attribute by embedding special format  characters  listed  under
690              the  -format option.  The comment is not drawn on the image, but
691              is embedded in the image datastream via a "Comment" tag or simi‐
692              lar mechanism.  If you want the comment to be visible on the im‐
693              age itself, use the -draw option instead.
694
695              For example,
696
697                   -comment "%m:%f %wx%h"
698
699              produces an image comment of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image
700              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
701
702              If the first character of string is @, the image comment is read
703              from a file titled by the remaining characters  in  the  string.
704              Please  note  that  if the string comes from an untrusted source
705              that it should be sanitized before use since otherwise the  con‐
706              tent  of  an  arbitrary readable file could be incorporated in a
707              comment in the output file (a security risk).
708
709              If the -comment option appears multiple  times,  only  the  last
710              comment is stored.
711
712              In  PNG  images,  the  comment is stored in a tEXt or zTXt chunk
713              with the keyword "comment".
714
715       -compose <operator>
716              the type of image composition
717
718              The description of composition uses abstract terminology in  or‐
719              der  to allow the the description to be more clear, while avoid‐
720              ing constant values which are specific  to  a  particular  build
721              configuration.  Each  image  pixel is represented by red, green,
722              and blue levels (which are equal for a gray  pixel).  MaxRGB  is
723              the  maximum  integral  value  which  may  be stored in the red,
724              green, or blue channels of the image. Each image pixel may  also
725              optionally (if the image matte channel is enabled) have an asso‐
726              ciated level of opacity (ranging from  opaque  to  transparent),
727              which  may be used to determine the influence of the pixel color
728              when compositing the pixel with another image pixel. If the  im‐
729              age  matte channel is disabled, then all pixels in the image are
730              treated as opaque.  The color of an opaque pixel is fully  visi‐
731              ble while the color of a transparent pixel color is entirely ab‐
732              sent (pixel color is ignored).
733
734              By definition, raster images have a rectangular shape. All image
735              rows  are  of  equal length, and all image columns have the same
736              number of rows. By treating the  opacity  channel  as  a  visual
737              "mask"  the rectangular image may be given a "shape" by treating
738              the opacity channel as a cookie-cutter  for  the  image.  Pixels
739              within  the shape are opaque, while pixels outside the shape are
740              transparent. Pixels on the boundary of the shape may be  between
741              opaque  and  transparent  in order to provide antialiasing (vis‐
742              ually smooth edges). The description of the  composition  opera‐
743              tors  use this concept of image "shape" in order to make the de‐
744              scription of the operators easier to  understand.  While  it  is
745              convenient  to  describe the operators in terms of "shapes" they
746              are by no means limited to mask-style operations since they  are
747              based  on continuous floating-point mathematics rather than sim‐
748              ple boolean operations.
749
750              By default, the Over composite operator is used.  The  following
751              composite operators are available:
752
753                   Over
754                   In
755                   Out
756                   Atop
757                   Xor
758                   Plus
759                   Minus
760                   Add
761                   Subtract
762                   Difference
763                   Divide
764                   Multiply
765                   Bumpmap
766                   Copy
767                   CopyRed
768                   CopyGreen
769                   CopyBlue
770                   CopyOpacity
771                   CopyCyan
772                   CopyMagenta
773                   CopyYellow
774                   CopyBlack
775
776              The behavior of each operator is described below.
777
778
779               Over
780
781                    The result will be the union of the two image shapes, with
782                    opaque areas of change-image obscuring base-image  in  the
783                    region of overlap.
784
785               In
786
787                    The  result  is  simply  change-image  cut by the shape of
788                    base-image. None of the image data of base-image  will  be
789                    in the result.
790
791               Out
792
793                    The  resulting  image  is  change-image  with the shape of
794                    base-image cut out.
795
796               Atop
797
798                    The result is the same shape as base-image,  with  change-
799                    image obscuring base-image where the image shapes overlap.
800                    Note this differs from over because the portion of change-
801                    image  outside  base-image's  shape does not appear in the
802                    result.
803
804               Xor
805
806                    The result is the image data from  both  change-image  and
807                    base-image that is outside the overlap region. The overlap
808                    region will be blank.
809
810               Plus
811
812                    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output  val‐
813                    ues are cropped to MaxRGB (no overflow). This operation is
814                    independent of the matte channels.
815
816               Minus
817
818                    The result of change-image -  base-image,  with  underflow
819                    cropped  to  zero.  The  matte  channel is ignored (set to
820                    opaque, full coverage).
821
822               Add
823
824                    The result of change-image  +  base-image,  with  overflow
825                    wrapping around (mod MaxRGB+1).
826
827               Subtract
828
829                    The  result  of  change-image - base-image, with underflow
830                    wrapping around (mod MaxRGB+1). The add and subtract oper‐
831                    ators can be used to perform reversible transformations.
832
833               Difference
834
835                    The result of abs(change-image - base-image). This is use‐
836                    ful for comparing two very similar images.
837
838               Divide
839
840                    The result of change-image / base-image.  This  is  useful
841                    for  improving the readability of text on unevenly illumi‐
842                    nated photos (by using a gaussian blurred copy of  change-
843                    image as base-image).
844
845               Multiply
846
847                    The  result  of  change-image * base-image. This is useful
848                    for the creation of drop-shadows.
849
850               Bumpmap
851
852                    The result base-image shaded by change-image.
853
854               Copy
855
856                    The resulting image is base-image replaced with change-im‐
857                    age. Here the matte information is ignored.
858
859               CopyRed
860
861                    The  resulting  image is the red channel in base-image re‐
862                    placed with the red channel  in  change-image.  The  other
863                    channels are copied untouched.
864
865               CopyGreen
866
867                    The resulting image is the green channel in base-image re‐
868                    placed with the green channel in change-image.  The  other
869                    channels are copied untouched.
870
871               CopyBlue
872
873                    The  resulting image is the blue channel in base-image re‐
874                    placed with the blue channel in  change-image.  The  other
875                    channels are copied untouched.
876
877               CopyOpacity
878
879                    The  resulting  image is the opacity channel in base-image
880                    replaced with the opacity  channel  in  change-image.  The
881                    other channels are copied untouched.
882
883               CopyCyan
884
885                    The  resulting image is the cyan channel in base-image re‐
886                    placed with the cyan channel in  change-image.  The  other
887                    channels  are  copied  untouched. Use of this operator re‐
888                    quires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
889
890               CopyMagenta
891
892                    The resulting image is the magenta channel  in  base-image
893                    replaced  with  the  magenta  channel in change-image. The
894                    other channels are copied untouched. Use of this  operator
895                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
896
897               CopyYellow
898
899                    The  resulting  image  is the yellow channel in base-image
900                    replaced with the  yellow  channel  in  change-image.  The
901                    other  channels are copied untouched. Use of this operator
902                    requires that base-image be in CMYK(A) colorspace.
903
904               CopyBlack
905
906                    The resulting image is the black channel in base-image re‐
907                    placed  with  the black channel in change-image. The other
908                    channels are copied untouched. Use of  this  operator  re‐
909                    quires  that  base-image  be  in  CMYK(A)  colorspace.  If
910                    change-image is not in CMYK space, then  the  change-image
911                    pixel intensities are used.
912
913
914
915
916       -compress <type>
917              the type of image compression
918
919              Choices  are:  None,  BZip, Fax, Group3, Group4, JPEG, Lossless,
920              LZW, RLE, Zip, LZMA, JPEG2000, JPEG2000, JBIG, JBIG2,  WebP,  or
921              ZSTD.
922
923
924              Specify  +compress  to store the binary image in an uncompressed
925              format.  The default is the compression type  of  the  specified
926              image file.
927
928              "Lossless"  refers  to lossless JPEG, which is only available if
929              the JPEG library has been patched to support it. Use of lossless
930              JPEG is generally not recommended.
931
932              Use  the -quality option to set the compression level to be used
933              by the JPEG, JPEG-2000, PNG, MIFF, MPEG, and TIFF encoders.  Use
934              the  -sampling-factor  option  to  set the sampling factor to be
935              used by the DPX, JPEG, MPEG, and YUV encoders  for  downsampling
936              the chroma channels.
937
938       -contrast
939              enhance or reduce the image contrast
940
941              This  option  enhances  the  intensity  differences  between the
942              lighter and darker elements of the image. Use -contrast  to  en‐
943              hance the image or +contrast to reduce the image contrast.
944
945
946              For a more pronounced effect you can repeat the option:
947
948                  gm convert rose: -contrast -contrast rose_c2.png
949
950       -convolve <kernel>
951              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
952
953              The  kernel  is  specified as a comma-separated list of floating
954              point values, ordered left-to right, starting with the top  row.
955              The  order of the kernel is determined by the square root of the
956              number of entries.  Presently only square kernels are supported.
957
958       -create-directories
959              create output directory if required
960
961              Use this option with -output-directory if the input  paths  con‐
962              tain  subdirectories  and it is desired to create similar subdi‐
963              rectories in the output directory.  Without this option, mogrify
964              will fail if the required output directory does not exist.
965
966       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
967              preferred size and location of the cropped image
968
969              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.
970
971              The width and height give the size of the image that remains af‐
972              ter cropping, and x and y are offsets that give the location  of
973              the  top  left  corner  of the cropped image with respect to the
974              original image.  To specify the amount to be removed, use -shave
975              instead.
976
977              If the x and y offsets are present, a single image is generated,
978              consisting of the pixels from the cropping region.  The  offsets
979              specify  the  location  of the upper left corner of the cropping
980              region measured downward and rightward with respect to the upper
981              left  corner  of  the  image.  If the -gravity option is present
982              with NorthEast, East, or SouthEast gravity, it  gives  the  dis‐
983              tance  leftward  from  the  right edge of the image to the right
984              edge of the cropping region.  Similarly, if the -gravity  option
985              is present with SouthWest, South, or SouthEast gravity, the dis‐
986              tance is measured upward between the bottom edges.
987
988              If the x and y offsets are omitted, a set of tiles of the speci‐
989              fied  geometry,  covering  the entire input image, is generated.
990              The rightmost tiles and the bottom  tiles  are  smaller  if  the
991              specified  geometry  extends  beyond the dimensions of the input
992              image.
993
994       -cycle <amount>
995              displace image colormap by amount
996
997              Amount defines the number of positions each colormap  entry  is‐
998              shifted.
999
1000
1001       -debug <events>
1002              enable debug printout
1003
1004              The  events  parameter  specifies which events are to be logged.
1005              It can be either None, All, or a comma-separated list consisting
1006              of  one or more of the following domains: Annotate, Blob, Cache,
1007              Coder, Configure, Deprecate, Error, Exception,  FatalError,  In‐
1008              formation,  Locale,  Option,  Render,  Resource,  TemporaryFile,
1009              Transform, User.  Warning, or X11, For example, to log cache and
1010              blob events, use
1011
1012                  gm convert -debug "Cache,Blob" rose: rose.png
1013
1014              The  "User"  domain  is  normally  empty, but developers can log
1015              "User" events in their private copy of GraphicsMagick.
1016
1017              Use the -log option to specify the format for debugging output.
1018
1019              Use +debug to turn off all logging.
1020
1021              An alternative to using -debug is to use the MAGICK_DEBUG  envi‐
1022              ronment  variable. The allowed values for the MAGICK_DEBUG envi‐
1023              ronment variable are the same as for the -debug option.
1024
1025       -deconstruct
1026              break down an image sequence into constituent parts
1027
1028              This option compares each image with the next in a sequence  and
1029              returns  the maximum bounding region of any pixel differences it
1030              discovers.  This method can undo a coalesced  sequence  returned
1031              by  the  -coalesce  option, and is useful for removing redundant
1032              information from a GIF or MNG animation.
1033
1034              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
1035              option.  If the -deconstruct option appears after all of the in‐
1036              put images, all images are deconstructed.
1037
1038       -define <key>{=<value>},...
1039              add coder/decoder specific options This option  creates  one  or
1040              more  definitions  for  coders and decoders to use while reading
1041              and writing image data. Definitions may be passed to coders  and
1042              decoders  to  control options that are specific to certain image
1043              formats. If value is missing for a definition,  an  empty-valued
1044              definition  of  a  flag  will be created with that name. This is
1045              used to control on/off options. Use +define <key>,... to  remove
1046              definitions  previously  created.  Use +define "*" to remove all
1047              existing definitions.
1048
1049              The following definitions may be created:
1050
1051
1052               cineon:colorspace={rgb|cineonlog}
1053
1054                    Use the cineon:colorspace option  when  reading  a  Cineon
1055                    file  to specify the colorspace the Cineon file uses. This
1056                    overrides the colorspace type implied by  the  DPX  header
1057                    (if any).
1058
1059               dpx:bits-per-sample=<value>
1060
1061                    If  the dpx:bits-per-sample key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1062                    will write DPX images with the specified bits per  sample,
1063                    overriding any existing depth value. If this option is not
1064                    specified, then the value is based on the  existing  image
1065                    depth value from the original image file. The DPX standard
1066                    supports bits per sample values of 1, 8, 10, 12,  and  16.
1067                    Many DPX readers demand a sample size of 10 bits with type
1068                    A padding (see below).
1069
1070               dpx:colorspace={rgb|cineonlog}
1071
1072                    Use the dpx:colorspace option when reading a DPX  file  to
1073                    specify  the  colorspace the DPX file uses. This overrides
1074                    the colorspace type implied by the DPX header (if any).
1075
1076               dpx:packing-method={packed|a|b|lsbpad|msbpad}
1077
1078                    DPX samples are output within 32-bit words.  They  may  be
1079                    tightly  packed  end-to-end  within  the words ("packed"),
1080                    padded with null bits to the right of the sample  ("a"  or
1081                    "lsbpad"),  or  padded  with  null bits to the left of the
1082                    sample ("b" or "msbpad"). This option only has  an  effect
1083                    for  sample  sizes  of  10  or 12 bits. If samples are not
1084                    packed, the DPX standard recommends type A  padding.  Many
1085                    DPX  readers  demand  a sample size of 10 bits with type A
1086                    padding.
1087
1088               dpx:pixel-endian={lsb|msb}
1089
1090                    Allows the user to specify the endian order of the  pixels
1091                    when  reading  or writing the DPX files. Sometimes this is
1092                    useful if the file is (or must be) written incorrectly  so
1093                    that  the file header and the pixels use different endian‐
1094                    ness.
1095
1096               dpx:swap-samples={true|false}
1097
1098               dpx:swap-samples-read={true|false}
1099
1100               dpx:swap-samples-write={true|false}
1101
1102                    GraphicsMagick strives to adhere to the DPX  standard  but
1103                    certain aspects of the standard can be quite confusing. As
1104                    a result, some 10-bit DPX files have Red and  Blue  inter‐
1105                    changed, or Cb and Cr interchanged due to an different in‐
1106                    terpretation  of  the  standard,  or  getting  the   wires
1107                    crossed.  The  swap-samples  option  may  be supplied when
1108                    reading or writing in order to read  or  write  using  the
1109                    necessary  sample order.  Use swap-samples-read when swap‐
1110                    ping should only occur in  the  reader,  or  swap-samples-
1111                    write when swapping should only occur in the writer.
1112
1113               gradient:direction={South|North|West|East|NorthWest|North‐
1114               East|SouthWest|SouthEast}
1115
1116                    By default, the gradient coder produces  a  gradient  from
1117                    top to bottom ("South").  Since GraphicsMagick 1.3.35, the
1118                    gradient direction may be specified  to  produce  gradient
1119                    vectors  according  to  a gravity-like specification.  The
1120                    arguments are South (Top  to  Bottom),  North  (Bottom  to
1121                    Top),  West  (Right to Left), East (Left to Right), North‐
1122                    West (Bottom-Right to Top-Left), NorthEast (Bottom-Left to
1123                    Top-Right),  SouthWest (Top-Right Bottom-Left), and South‐
1124                    East (Top-Left to Bottom-Right).
1125
1126               jp2:rate=<value>
1127
1128                    Specify  the  compression  factor  to  use  while  writing
1129                    JPEG-2000  files. The compression factor is the reciprocal
1130                    of the compression ratio. The valid range is 0.0  to  1.0,
1131                    with 1.0 indicating lossless compression. If defined, this
1132                    value overrides the -quality setting. The default  quality
1133                    setting of 75 results in a rate value of 0.06641.
1134
1135               jpeg:block-smoothing={true|false}
1136
1137                    Enables  or  disables  block smoothing when reading a JPEG
1138                    file (default enabled).
1139
1140               jpeg:dct-method=<value>
1141
1142                    Selects the IJG JPEG library DCT  implementation  to  use.
1143                    The  encoding  implementations  vary in speed and encoding
1144                    error. The available choices for value are  islow,  ifast,
1145                    float,  default  and  fastest. Note that fastest might not
1146                    necessarily be fastest  on  your  CPU,  depending  on  the
1147                    choices  made when the JPEG library was built and how your
1148                    CPU behaves.
1149
1150               jpeg:fancy-upsampling={true|false}
1151
1152                    Enables or disables fancy upsampling when reading  a  JPEG
1153                    file (default enabled).
1154
1155               jpeg:max-scan-number=<value>
1156
1157                    Specifies  an integer value for the maximum number of pro‐
1158                    gressive scans allowed in a JPEG file.  The default  maxi‐
1159                    mum is 100 scans.  This limit is imposed due to a weakness
1160                    in the JPEG standard which allows small JPEG files to take
1161                    many minutes or hours to be read.
1162
1163               jpeg:max-warnings=<value>
1164
1165                    Specifies  an  integer value for how many warnings are al‐
1166                    lowed for any given error type before being promoted to  a
1167                    hard error.  JPEG files producing excessive warnings indi‐
1168                    cate a problem with the file.
1169
1170               jpeg:optimize-coding={true|false}
1171
1172                    Selects if huffman encoding should be used. Huffman encod‐
1173                    ing  is  enabled  by default, but may be disabled for very
1174                    large images since it encoding requires  that  the  entire
1175                    image  be  buffered  in  memory. Huffman encoding produces
1176                    smaller JPEG files at the  expense  of  added  compression
1177                    time and memory consumption.
1178
1179               jpeg:preserve-settings
1180
1181                    If  the  jpeg:preserve-settings  flag is defined, the JPEG
1182                    encoder will use the same "quality" and  "sampling-factor"
1183                    settings  that  were found in the input file, if the input
1184                    was in JPEG format. These settings are also  preserved  if
1185                    the input is a JPEG file and the output is a JNG file.  If
1186                    the colorspace of the output file differs from that of the
1187                    input  file, the quality setting is preserved but the sam‐
1188                    pling-factors are not.
1189
1190               pcl:fit-to-page
1191
1192                    If the pcl:fit-to-page flag is defined, then  the  printer
1193                    is  requested  to  scale  the  image  to fit the page size
1194                    (width and/or height).
1195               png:chunk-malloc-max=<value>
1196
1197                    png:chunk-malloc-max specifies the maximum chunk size that
1198                    libpng  will be allowed to read.  Libpng's default is nor‐
1199                    mally 8,000,000 bytes. Very rarely, a valid PNG  file  may
1200                    be  encountered where the error is reported "chunk data is
1201                    too large".  In this case, the limit may be increased  us‐
1202                    ing  this  option.   Take  care when increasing this limit
1203                    since an excessively large  limit  could  allow  untrusted
1204                    files to use excessive memory.
1205
1206               mng:maximum-loops=<value>
1207
1208                    mng:maximum-loops  specifies  the  maximum number of loops
1209                    allowed to be specified by a MNG LOOP  chunk.  Without  an
1210                    imposed  limit,  a MNG file could request up to 2147483647
1211                    loops, which could run for a very long time.  The  current
1212                    default limit is 512 loops.
1213
1214               pdf:use-cropbox={true|false}
1215
1216                    If  the  pdf:use-cropbox  flag is set to true, then Ghost‐
1217                    script is requested to apply the PDF crop box.
1218
1219               pdf:stop-on-error={true|false}
1220
1221                    If the pdf:stop-on-error flag is set to true, then  Ghost‐
1222                    script  is  requested  to stop processing the PDF when the
1223                    first error is encountered.  Otherwise it will attempt  to
1224                    process all requested pages.
1225
1226               ps:imagemask
1227
1228                    If  the  ps:imagemask  flag  is  defined, the PS3 and EPS3
1229                    coders will create Postscript files  that  render  bilevel
1230                    images  with  the Postscript imagemask operator instead of
1231                    the image operator.
1232
1233               ptif:minimum-geometry=<geometry>
1234
1235                    If the ptif:minimum-geometry key is defined,  GraphicsMag‐
1236                    ick  will  use  it  to determine the minimum frame size to
1237                    output when writing a pyramid TIFF file (a TIFF file  con‐
1238                    taining  a  succession  of  reduced  versions of the first
1239                    frame). The default minimum geometry is 32x32.
1240
1241               tiff:alpha={unspecified|associated|unassociated}
1242
1243                    Specify the TIFF alpha channel type when reading or  writ‐
1244                    ing  TIFF  files, overriding the normal value. The default
1245                    alpha channel type for new files is unspecified alpha. Ex‐
1246                    isting  alpha  settings are preserved when converting from
1247                    one TIFF file to another. When a TIFF file uses associated
1248                    alpha,  the image pixels are pre-multiplied (i.e. altered)
1249                    with the alpha channel. Files with "associated" alpha  ap‐
1250                    pear  as  if  they  were alpha composited on a black back‐
1251                    ground when the matte channel is disabled. If the  unasso‐
1252                    ciated  alpha  type is selected, then the alpha channel is
1253                    saved without altering the  pixels.  Photoshop  recognizes
1254                    associated  alpha as transparency information, if the file
1255                    is saved with unassociated alpha, the alpha information is
1256                    loaded  as  an  independent  channel.   Note that for many
1257                    years, ImageMagick and GraphicsMagick marked TIFF files as
1258                    using  associated  alpha, without properly pre-multiplying
1259                    the pixels.
1260
1261               tiff:fill-order={msb2lsb|lsb2msb}
1262
1263                    If the tiff:fill-order key is defined, GraphicsMagick will
1264                    use  it to determine the bit fill order used while writing
1265                    TIFF files. The normal default is "msb2lsb", which matches
1266                    the  native  bit order of all modern CPUs. The only excep‐
1267                    tion to this is when Group3 or Group4 FAX  compression  is
1268                    requested since FAX machines send data in bit-reversed or‐
1269                    der and therefore RFC 2301 recommends using reverse order.
1270
1271               tiff:group-three-options=<value>
1272
1273                    If the tiff:group-three-options key is defined,  Graphics‐
1274                    Magick  will  use  it  to  set the group3 options tag when
1275                    writing group3-compressed TIFF.  Please see the TIFF spec‐
1276                    ification for the usage of this tag.  The default value is
1277                    4.
1278
1279               tiff:ignore-tags=<tags>
1280
1281                    If the tiff:ignore-tags key is defined, then it is used as
1282                    a  list  of comma-delimited integer TIFF tag values to ig‐
1283                    nore while reading the TIFF file.  This is useful in order
1284                    to  be  able  to  read files which which otherwise fail to
1285                    read due to problems with TIFF tags.  Note that some  TIFF
1286                    tags  are  required  in order to be able to read the image
1287                    data at all.
1288
1289               tiff:report-warnings={false|true}
1290
1291                    If the tiff:report-warnings key  is  defined  and  set  to
1292                    true,  then TIFF warnings are reported as a warning excep‐
1293                    tion rather than as a coder log  message.   Such  warnings
1294                    are  reported  after  the  image has been read or written.
1295                    Most TIFF warnings are benign but sometimes they may  help
1296                    deduce  problems  with  the TIFF file, or help detect that
1297                    the TIFF file requires a special application to read  suc‐
1298                    cessfully due to the use of proprietary or specialized ex‐
1299                    tensions.
1300
1301               tiff:sample-format={unsigned|ieeefp}
1302
1303                    If the tiff:sample-format key is  defined,  GraphicsMagick
1304                    will  use  it  to  determine  the sample format used while
1305                    writing TIFF files. The  default  is  "unsigned".  Specify
1306                    "ieeefp"  in order to write floating-point TIFF files with
1307                    float  (32-bit)  or  double  (64-bit)  values.   Use   the
1308                    tiff:bits-per-sample  define  to  determine  the  type  of
1309                    floating-point value to use.
1310
1311               tiff:max-sample-value=<value>
1312
1313                    If the tiff:max-sample-value key is defined,  GraphicsMag‐
1314                    ick  will  use  the assigned value as the maximum floating
1315                    point value while reading or writing IEEE  floating  point
1316                    TIFFs. Otherwise the maximum value is 1.0 or the value ob‐
1317                    tained from the file's SMaxSampleValue tag  (if  present).
1318                    The  floating  point  data is currently not scanned in ad‐
1319                    vance to determine a best maximum sample value so  if  the
1320                    range  is  not  1.0,  or  the  SMaxSampleValue  tag is not
1321                    present, it may be necessary to (intelligently)  use  this
1322                    parameter to properly read a file.
1323
1324               tiff:min-sample-value=<value>
1325
1326                    If  the tiff:min-sample-value key is defined, GraphicsMag‐
1327                    ick will use the assigned value as  the  minimum  floating
1328                    point  value  while reading or writing IEEE floating point
1329                    TIFFs. Otherwise the minimum value is 0.0 or the value ob‐
1330                    tained from the file's SMinSampleValue tag (if present).
1331
1332               tiff:bits-per-sample=<value>
1333
1334                    If the tiff:bits-per-sample key is defined, GraphicsMagick
1335                    will write images with  the  specified  bits  per  sample,
1336                    overriding  any  existing depth value. Value may be any in
1337                    the range of 1 to 32, or 64 when  the  default  ´unsigned'
1338                    format  is  written,  or  16/32/24/64  if IEEEFP format is
1339                    written.  Please note that the baseline TIFF 6.0  specifi‐
1340                    cation  only  requires readers to handle certain powers of
1341                    two, and the values to be handled depend on the nature  of
1342                    the image (e.g. colormapped, grayscale, RGB, CMYK).
1343
1344               tiff:samples-per-pixel=<value>
1345
1346                    If  the  tiff:samples-per-pixel key is defined to a value,
1347                    the TIFF coder will write TIFF  images  with  the  defined
1348                    samples  per pixel, overriding any value stored in the im‐
1349                    age. This option should not normally be used.
1350
1351               tiff:rows-per-strip=<value>
1352
1353                    Allows the user to specify the number  of  rows  per  TIFF
1354                    strip.   Rounded  up  to  a multiple of 16 when using JPEG
1355                    compression. Ignored when using tiles.
1356
1357               tiff:strip-per-page=true
1358
1359                    Requests that the image is written in a single TIFF strip.
1360                    This  is  normally  the default when group3 or group4 com‐
1361                    pression is requested within reasonable limits. Requesting
1362                    a  single strip for large images may result in failure due
1363                    to resource consumption in the writer or reader.
1364
1365               tiff:tile
1366
1367                    Enable writing tiled TIFF (rather than stripped) using the
1368                    default  tile  size.  Tiled TIFF organizes the image as an
1369                    array of smaller images (tiles) in order to enable  random
1370                    access.
1371
1372               tiff:tile-geometry=<width>x<height>
1373
1374                    Specify  the  tile  size  to use while writing tiled TIFF.
1375                    Width and height should be a multiple of 16. If the  value
1376                    is not a multiple of 16, then it will be rounded down. En‐
1377                    ables tiled TIFF if  it  has  not  already  been  enabled.
1378                    GraphicsMagick  does  not  use tiled storage internally so
1379                    tiles need to be converted back and forth from the  inter‐
1380                    nal  scanline-oriented  storage  to tile-oriented storage.
1381                    Testing with typical RGB images shows that  useful  square
1382                    tile  size  values  range from 128x128 to 1024x1024. Large
1383                    images which require using a disk-based pixel cache  bene‐
1384                    fit from large tile sizes while images which fit in memory
1385                    work well with smaller tile sizes.
1386
1387               tiff:tile-width=<width>
1388
1389                    Specify the tile width to use while  writing  tiled  TIFF.
1390                    The  tile height is then defaulted to an appropriate size.
1391                    Width should be a multiple of 16. If the value  is  not  a
1392                    multiple  of  16,  then  it will be rounded down.  Enables
1393                    tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1394
1395               tiff:tile-height=<height>
1396
1397                    Specify the tile height to use while writing  tiled  TIFF.
1398                    The  tile  width is then defaulted to an appropriate size.
1399                    Height should be a multiple of 16. If the value is  not  a
1400                    multiple  of  16,  then  it will be rounded down.  Enables
1401                    tiled TIFF if it has not already been enabled.
1402
1403               tiff:webp-lossless={TRUE|FALSE}
1404
1405                    Specify a value of TRUE  to  enable  lossless  mode  while
1406                    writing WebP-compressed TIFF files. The WebP webp:lossless
1407                    option may also be used.  The quality factor  set  by  the
1408                    -quality  option may be used to influence the level of ef‐
1409                    fort expended while compressing.
1410
1411               tiff:zstd-compress-level=<value>
1412
1413                    Specify the compression level to use while  writing  Zstd-
1414                    compressed TIFF files. The valid range is 1 to 22. If this
1415                    define is not specified, then the 'quality' value is  used
1416                    such  that the default quality setting of 75 is translated
1417                    to a compress level of 9 such that ´quality' has a  useful
1418                    range of 10-184 if used for this purpose.
1419
1420               webp:lossless={true|false}
1421
1422                    Enable lossless encoding.
1423
1424               webp:method={0-6}
1425
1426                    Quality/speed trade-off.
1427
1428               webp:image-hint={default,graph,photo,picture}
1429
1430                    Hint for image type.
1431
1432               webp:target-size=<integer>
1433
1434                    Target size in bytes.
1435
1436               webp:target-psnr=<float>
1437
1438                    Minimal distortion to try to achieve.
1439
1440               webp:segments={1-4}
1441
1442                    Maximum number of segments to use.
1443
1444               webp:sns-strength={0-100}
1445
1446                    Spatial Noise Shaping.
1447
1448               webp:filter-strength={0-100}
1449
1450                    Filter strength.
1451
1452               webp:filter-sharpness={0-7}
1453
1454                    Filter sharpness.
1455
1456               webp:filter-type={0,1}
1457
1458                    Filtering  type. 0 = simple, 1 = strong (only used if fil‐
1459                    ter-strength > 0 or autofilter is enabled).
1460
1461               webp:auto-filter={true|false}
1462
1463                    Auto adjust filter's strength.
1464
1465               webp:alpha-compression=<integer>
1466
1467                    Algorithm for encoding the alpha plane (0 = none, 1 = com‐
1468                    pressed with WebP lossless). Default is 1.
1469
1470               webp:alpha-filtering=<integer>
1471
1472                    Predictive  filtering  method for alpha plane. 0: none, 1:
1473                    fast, 2: best. Default is 1.
1474
1475               webp:alpha-quality={0-100}
1476
1477                    Between 0 (smallest size) and 100 (lossless).  Default  is
1478                    100.
1479
1480               webp:pass=[1..10]
1481
1482                    Number of entropy-analysis passes.
1483
1484               webp:show-compressed={true|false}
1485
1486                    Export  the compressed picture back.  In-loop filtering is
1487                    not applied.
1488
1489               webp:preprocessing=[0,1,2]
1490
1491                    0=none, 1=segment-smooth, 2=pseudo-random dithering
1492
1493               webp:partitions=[0-3]
1494
1495                    log2(number of token partitions) in [0..3].  Default is  0
1496                    for easier progressive decoding.
1497
1498               webp:partition-limit={0-100}
1499
1500                    Quality  degradation allowed to fit the 512k limit on pre‐
1501                    diction modes coding (0: no degradation, 100: maximum pos‐
1502                    sible degradation).
1503
1504               webp:emulate-jpeg-size={true|false}
1505
1506                    If true, compression parameters will be remapped to better
1507                    match the expected output size from JPEG compression. Gen‐
1508                    erally,  the  output size will be similar but the degrada‐
1509                    tion will be lower.
1510
1511               webp:thread-level=<integer>
1512
1513                    If non-zero, try and use multi-threaded encoding.
1514
1515               webp:low-memory={true|false}
1516
1517                    If set, reduce memory usage (but increase CPU use)
1518
1519               webp:use-sharp-yuv={true|false}
1520
1521                    If set, if needed, use sharp (and slow)  RGB->YUV  conver‐
1522                    sion
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527               For  example, to create a postscript file that will render only
1528               the black pixels of a bilevel image, use:
1529
1530                   gm convert bilevel.tif -define ps:imagemask eps3:stencil.ps
1531
1532       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
1533              display the next image after pausing
1534
1535              This option is useful for regulating the animation of image  se‐
1536              quences  Delay/100 seconds must expire before the display of the
1537              next image. The default is no delay between each showing of  the
1538              image sequence. The maximum delay is 65535.
1539
1540              You  can  specify  a delay range (e.g. -delay 10-500) which sets
1541              the minimum and maximum delay.
1542
1543       -density <width>x<height>
1544              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the  image  This
1545              option  specifies the image resolution to store while encoding a
1546              raster image or the canvas resolution while rendering  (reading)
1547              vector  formats  such  as  Postscript,  PDF, WMF, and SVG into a
1548              raster image. Image resolution provides the unit of  measure  to
1549              apply  when  rendering  to an output device or raster image. The
1550              default unit of measure is in dots per inch  (DPI).  The  -units
1551              option may be used to select dots per centimeter instead.
1552               The default resolution is 72 dots per inch, which is equivalent
1553              to one point per pixel (Macintosh and Postscript standard). Com‐
1554              puter screens are normally 72 or 96 dots per inch while printers
1555              typically support 150, 300, 600, or 1200 dots per inch.  To  de‐
1556              termine  the  resolution of your display, use a ruler to measure
1557              the width of your screen in inches, and divide by the number  of
1558              horizontal  pixels  (1024  on  a 1024x768 display).  If the file
1559              format supports it, this option may be used to update the stored
1560              image  resolution.  Note that Photoshop stores and obtains image
1561              resolution from a proprietary embedded profile. If this  profile
1562              is  not stripped from the image, then Photoshop will continue to
1563              treat the image using its former resolution, ignoring the  image
1564              resolution  specified  in the standard file header.  The density
1565              option is an attribute and does not alter the underlying  raster
1566              image.  It  may  be used to adjust the rendered size for desktop
1567              publishing purposes by adjusting the scale applied to  the  pix‐
1568              els.  To  resize the image so that it is the same size at a dif‐
1569              ferent resolution, use the -resample option.
1570
1571       -depth <value>
1572              depth of the image
1573
1574              This is the number of bits of color to preserve  in  the  image.
1575              Any value between 1 and QuantumDepth (build option) may be spec‐
1576              ified, although 8 or 16 are the most common values. Use this op‐
1577              tion  to  specify the depth of raw images whose depth is unknown
1578              such as GRAY, RGB, or CMYK, or to change the depth of any  image
1579              after it has been read.  The depth option is applied to the pix‐
1580              els immediately so it may be used as a form of  simple  compres‐
1581              sion  by  discarding  the  least  significant bits. Reducing the
1582              depth in advance may speed up color quantization, and help  cre‐
1583              ate  smaller  file sizes when using a compression algorithm like
1584              LZW or ZIP.
1585
1586       -descend
1587              obtain image by descending window hierarchy
1588
1589       -despeckle
1590              reduce the speckles within an image
1591
1592       -displace <horizontal scale>x<vertical scale>
1593              shift image pixels as defined by a displacement map
1594
1595              With this option, composite image is used as a displacement map.
1596              Black,  within  the displacement map, is a maximum positive dis‐
1597              placement.  White is a maximum negative displacement and  middle
1598              gray  is  neutral.   The displacement is scaled to determine the
1599              pixel shift.  By default, the displacement applies in  both  the
1600              horizontal  and  vertical  directions.   However, if you specify
1601              mask, composite image is the horizontal X displacement and  mask
1602              the vertical Y displacement.
1603
1604       -display <host:display[.screen]>
1605              specifies the X server to contact
1606
1607              This  option  is  used  with convert for obtaining image or font
1608              from this X server.  See X(1).
1609
1610       -dispose <method>
1611              GIF disposal method
1612
1613              The Disposal Method indicates the way in which the graphic is to
1614              be treated after being displayed.
1615
1616              Here are the valid methods:
1617
1618                  Undefined       No disposal specified.
1619                  None            Do not dispose between frames.
1620                  Background      Overwrite the image area with
1621                                  the background color.
1622                  Previous        Overwrite the image area with
1623                                  what was there prior to rendering
1624                                  the image.
1625
1626       -dissolve <percent>
1627              dissolve an image into another by the given percent
1628
1629              The  opacity  of  the composite image is multiplied by the given
1630              percent, then it is composited over the main image.
1631
1632       -dither
1633              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
1634
1635              The basic strategy of dithering is to trade intensity resolution
1636              for  spatial  resolution by averaging the intensities of several
1637              neighboring pixels.  Images which suffer from severe  contouring
1638              when reducing colors can be improved with this option.
1639
1640              The -colors or -monochrome option is required for this option to
1641              take effect.
1642
1643              Use +dither to turn off dithering and to render PostScript with‐
1644              out text or graphic aliasing. Disabling dithering often (but not
1645              always) leads to decreased processing time.
1646
1647       -draw <string>
1648              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
1649
1650              Use this option to annotate an image with one  or  more  graphic
1651              primitives.   The  primitives  include shapes, text, transforma‐
1652              tions, and pixel operations.  The shape primitives are
1653
1654                   point           x,y
1655                   line            x0,y0 x1,y1
1656                   rectangle       x0,y0 x1,y1
1657                   roundRectangle  x0,y0 x1,y1 wc,hc
1658                   arc             x0,y0 x1,y1 a0,a1
1659                   ellipse         x0,y0 rx,ry a0,a1
1660                   circle          x0,y0 x1,y1
1661                   polyline        x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1662                   polygon         x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1663                   Bezier          x0,y0  ...  xn,yn
1664                   path            path specification
1665                   image           operator x0,y0 w,h filename
1666
1667              The text primitive is
1668
1669                   text            x0,y0 string
1670
1671              The text gravity primitive is
1672
1673                   gravity         NorthWest, North, NorthEast, West, Center,
1674                                   East, SouthWest, South, or SouthEast
1675
1676              The text gravity primitive only affects the  placement  of  text
1677              and  does not interact with the other primitives.  It is equiva‐
1678              lent to using the -gravity commandline option, except that it is
1679              limited in scope to the -draw option in which it appears.
1680
1681              The transformation primitives are
1682
1683                   rotate          degrees
1684                   translate       dx,dy
1685                   scale           sx,sy
1686                   skewX           degrees
1687                   skewY           degrees
1688
1689              The pixel operation primitives are
1690
1691                   color           x0,y0 method
1692                   matte           x0,y0 method
1693
1694              The  shape  primitives  are  drawn in the color specified in the
1695              preceding -stroke option. Except for the line and  point  primi‐
1696              tives, they are filled with the color specified in the preceding
1697              -fill option.  For unfilled shapes, use -fill none.
1698
1699              Point requires a single coordinate.
1700
1701              Line requires a start and end coordinate.
1702
1703              Rectangle expects an upper left and lower right coordinate.
1704
1705              RoundRectangle has the upper left and  lower  right  coordinates
1706              and the width and height of the corners.
1707
1708              Circle  has  a  center coordinate and a coordinate for the outer
1709              edge.
1710
1711              Use Arc to inscribe an elliptical arc within a rectangle.   Arcs
1712              require  a start and end point as well as the degree of rotation
1713              (e.g. 130,30 200,100 45,90).
1714
1715              Use Ellipse to draw a partial  ellipse  centered  at  the  given
1716              point with the x-axis and y-axis radius and start and end of arc
1717              in degrees (e.g. 100,100 100,150 0,360).
1718
1719              Finally, polyline and polygon require three or more  coordinates
1720              to define its boundaries.  Coordinates are integers separated by
1721              an optional comma.  For example, to define a circle centered  at
1722              100,100 that extends to 150,150 use:
1723
1724                   -draw 'circle 100,100 150,150'
1725
1726              Paths (See Paths) represent an outline of an object which is de‐
1727              fined in terms of moveto (set a new current point), lineto (draw
1728              a  straight  line), curveto (draw a curve using a cubic Bezier),
1729              arc (elliptical or circular arc) and closepath (close  the  cur‐
1730              rent  shape by drawing a line to the last moveto) elements. Com‐
1731              pound paths (i.e., a path with subpaths, each  consisting  of  a
1732              single  moveto followed by one or more line or curve operations)
1733              are possible to allow effects such as "donut holes" in objects.
1734
1735              Use image to composite an image with another image.  Follow  the
1736              image keyword with the composite operator, image location, image
1737              size, and filename:
1738
1739                   -draw 'image Over 100,100 225,225 image.jpg'
1740
1741              You can use 0,0 for the image size, which means to use  the  ac‐
1742              tual dimensions found in the image header. Otherwise, it will be
1743              scaled to the given dimensions.  See -compose for a  description
1744              of the composite operators.
1745
1746              Use text to annotate an image with text. Follow the text coordi‐
1747              nates with a string. If the string has embedded spaces,  enclose
1748              it  in  single  or double quotes. Optionally you can include the
1749              image filename, type, width, height, or other image attribute by
1750              embedding special format character. See -comment for details.
1751
1752              For example,
1753
1754
1755                   -draw 'text 100,100 "%m:%f %wx%h"'
1756
1757
1758              annotates the image with MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for an image titled
1759              bird.miff
1760              and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
1761
1762              If the first character of string is @, the text is read
1763              from a file titled by the remaining characters in the string.  Please
1764              note that if the string comes from an untrusted source that it should
1765              be sanitized before use (a security risk).
1766
1767              Rotate rotates subsequent shape primitives and text primitives about
1768              the origin of the main image. If the -region option precedes the
1769              -draw option, the origin for transformations is the upper left
1770              corner of the region.
1771
1772              Translate translates them.
1773
1774              Scale scales them.
1775
1776              SkewX and SkewY skew them with respect to the origin of
1777              the main image or the region.
1778
1779              The transformations modify the current affine matrix, which is initialized
1780              from the initial affine matrix defined by the -affine option.
1781              Transformations are cumulative within the -draw option.
1782              The initial affine matrix is not affected; that matrix is only changed by the
1783              appearance of another -affine option.  If another -draw
1784              option appears, the current affine matrix is reinitialized from
1785              the initial affine matrix.
1786
1787              Use color to change the color of a pixel to the fill color (see
1788              -fill). Follow the pixel coordinate
1789              with a method:
1790
1791                   point
1792                   replace
1793                   floodfill
1794                   filltoborder
1795                   reset
1796
1797              Consider  the target pixel as that specified by your coordinate.
1798              The point method recolors the target pixel. The  replace  method
1799              recolors  any  pixel that matches the color of the target pixel.
1800              Floodfill recolors any pixel that matches the color of the  tar‐
1801              get  pixel  and is a neighbor, whereas filltoborder recolors any
1802              neighbor pixel that is not the border color. Finally, reset  re‐
1803              colors all pixels.
1804
1805              Use  matte  to  the change the pixel matte value to transparent.
1806              Follow the pixel coordinate with a method (see the color  primi‐
1807              tive for a description of methods). The point method changes the
1808              matte value of the target pixel. The replace method changes  the
1809              matte  value  of  any pixel that matches the color of the target
1810              pixel. Floodfill changes the  matte  value  of  any  pixel  that
1811              matches the color of the target pixel and is a neighbor, whereas
1812              filltoborder changes the matte value of any neighbor pixel  that
1813              is  not  the border color (-bordercolor).  Finally reset changes
1814              the matte value of all pixels.
1815
1816              You can set the primitive color, font,  and  font  bounding  box
1817              color with -fill, -font, and -box respectively. Options are pro‐
1818              cessed in command line order so be sure to use these options be‐
1819              fore the -draw option.
1820
1821       -edge <radius>
1822              detect edges within an image
1823
1824       -emboss <radius>
1825              emboss an image
1826
1827       -encoding <type>
1828              specify the text encoding
1829
1830              Choose from AdobeCustom, AdobeExpert, AdobeStandard, AppleRoman,
1831              BIG5, GB2312, Latin 2, None, SJIScode, Symbol, Unicode, Wansung.
1832
1833       -endian <type>
1834              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
1835
1836              MSB indicates big-endian (e.g. SPARC, Motorola  68K)  while  LSB
1837              indicates  little-endian  (e.g.  Intel 'x86, VAX) byte ordering.
1838              Native indicates to use the normal ordering for the current CPU.
1839              This  option currently only influences the CMYK, DPX, GRAY, RGB,
1840              and TIFF, formats.
1841
1842              Use +endian to revert to unspecified endianness.
1843
1844       -enhance
1845              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
1846
1847       -equalize
1848              perform histogram equalization to the image
1849
1850       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
1851              composite image on background color canvas image
1852
1853              This option composites the  image  on  a  new  background  color
1854              (-background)  canvas image of size <width>x<height>. The exist‐
1855              ing image content is composited at the position specified by ge‐
1856              ometry  x  and  y offset and/or desired gravity (-gravity) using
1857              the current image  compose  (-compose)  method.   Image  content
1858              which  falls  outside  the bounds of the new image dimensions is
1859              discarded.
1860
1861              For example, this command creates a thumbnail of an  image,  and
1862              centers  it on a red color backdrop image, offsetting the canvas
1863              ten pixels to the left and five pixels up, with respect  to  the
1864              thumbnail:
1865
1866                  gm convert infile.jpg -thumbnail 120x80 -background red -gravity center \
1867                            -extent 140x100-10-5 outfile.jpg
1868
1869              This  command  reduces  or  expands  a  JPEG  image to fit on an
1870              800x600 display:
1871
1872                  gm convert -size 800x600 input.jpg \
1873                            -resize 800x600 -background black \
1874                            -compose Copy -gravity center \
1875                            -extent 800x600 \
1876                            -quality 92 output.jpg
1877
1878              If the aspect ratio of the input image isn't exactly  4:3,  then
1879              the image is centered on an 800x600 black canvas.
1880
1881       -file <filename>
1882              write annotated difference image to file
1883
1884              If  -file  is  specified,  then an annotated difference image is
1885              generated and written to the specified file. Pixels which differ
1886              between the reference and compare images are modified from those
1887              in the compare image so that the changed pixels become more  ob‐
1888              vious.   Some images may require use of an alternative highlight
1889              style (see -highlight-style) or highlight color (see -highlight-
1890              color) before the changes are obvious.
1891
1892       -fill <color>
1893              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
1894
1895              Colors  are  represented in GraphicsMagick in the same form used
1896              by SVG. Use "gm convert -list color" to list named colors:
1897
1898                  name               (named color)
1899                  #RGB               (hex numbers, 4 bits each)
1900                  #RRGGBB            (8 bits each)
1901                  #RRRGGGBBB         (12 bits each)
1902                  #RRRRGGGGBBBB      (16 bits each)
1903                  #RGBA              (4 bits each)
1904                  #RRGGBBAA          (8 bits each)
1905                  #RRRGGGBBBAAA      (12 bits each)
1906                  #RRRRGGGGBBBBAAAA  (16 bits each)
1907                  rgb(r,g,b)         (r,g,b are decimal numbers)
1908                  rgba(r,g,b,a)      (r,g,b,a are decimal numbers)
1909
1910              Enclose the color specification in quotation  marks  to  prevent
1911              the "#" or the parentheses from being interpreted by your shell.
1912
1913              For example,
1914
1915                  gm convert -fill blue ...
1916                  gm convert -fill "#ddddff" ...
1917                  gm convert -fill "rgb(65000,65000,65535)" ...
1918
1919              The  shorter  forms  are scaled up, if necessary by replication.
1920              For example, #3af, #33aaff, and #3333aaaaffff  are  all  equiva‐
1921              lent.
1922
1923              See -draw for further details.
1924
1925       -filter <type>
1926              use this type of filter when resizing an image
1927
1928              Use  this  option  to  affect the resizing operation of an image
1929              (see -geometry).  Choose from these filters (ordered by approxi‐
1930              mate increasing CPU time):
1931
1932                   Point
1933                   Box
1934                   Triangle
1935                   Hermite
1936                   Hanning
1937                   Hamming
1938                   Blackman
1939                   Gaussian
1940                   Quadratic
1941                   Cubic
1942                   Catrom
1943                   Mitchell
1944                   Lanczos
1945                   Bessel
1946                   Sinc
1947
1948              The default filter is automatically selected to provide the best
1949              quality  while  consuming  a  reasonable  amount  of  time.  The
1950              Mitchell  filter  is  used if the image supports a palette, sup‐
1951              ports a matte channel, or is being enlarged, otherwise the Lanc‐
1952              zos filter is used.
1953
1954       -flatten
1955              flatten a sequence of images
1956
1957              In  some  file formats (e.g. Photoshop's PSD) complex images may
1958              be represented by "layers" (independent images)  which  must  be
1959              composited in order to obtain the final rendition.  The -flatten
1960              option accomplishes this composition.  The sequence of images is
1961              replaced  by a single image created by compositing each image in
1962              turn, while respecting composition operators and  page  offsets.
1963              While  -flatten is immediately useful for eliminating layers, it
1964              is also useful as a general-purpose composition tool.
1965
1966              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
1967              option.   If  the -flatten option appears after all of the input
1968              images, all images are flattened.  Also  see  -mosaic  which  is
1969              similar  to -flatten except that it adds a suitably-sized canvas
1970              base image.
1971
1972              For example, this composites an image on top of a 640x400 trans‐
1973              parent black canvas image:
1974
1975                  gm convert -size 640x300 xc:transparent \
1976                            -compose over -page +0-100 \
1977                            frame.png -flatten output.png
1978
1979              and this flattens a Photoshop PSD file:
1980
1981                  gm convert input.psd -flatten output.png
1982
1983       -flip  create a "mirror image"
1984
1985              reflect the scanlines in the vertical direction.
1986
1987       -flop  create a "mirror image"
1988
1989              reflect the scanlines in the horizontal direction.
1990
1991       -font <name>
1992              use this font when annotating the image with text
1993
1994              You  can tag a font to specify whether it is a PostScript, True‐
1995              Type, or X11 font.  For example, Arial.ttf is a  TrueType  font,
1996              ps:helvetica is PostScript, and x:fixed is X11.
1997
1998       -foreground <color>
1999              define the foreground color
2000
2001              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
2002              -fill option.
2003
2004       -format <type>
2005              the image format type
2006
2007              When used with the mogrify utility, this option will convert any
2008              image  to  the  image format you specify.  See GraphicsMagick(1)
2009              for a list of image format types supported by GraphicsMagick, or
2010              see the output of 'gm -list format'.
2011
2012              By  default  the file is written to its original name.  However,
2013              if the filename extension matches a supported format, the exten‐
2014              sion is replaced with the image format type specified with -for‐
2015              mat.  For example, if you specify tiff as the  format  type  and
2016              the input image filename is image.gif, the output image filename
2017              becomes image.tiff.
2018
2019       -format <string>
2020              output formatted image characteristics
2021
2022              When used with the identify utility, or the convert utility with
2023              output  written to the 'info:-' file specification, use this op‐
2024              tion to print information about the image in a  format  of  your
2025              choosing.   You  can  include  the  image filename, type, width,
2026              height, Exif data, or other image attributes by  embedding  spe‐
2027              cial format characters:
2028
2029                   %b   file size
2030                   %c   comment
2031                   %d   directory
2032                   %e   filename extension
2033                   %f   filename
2034                   %g   page dimensions and offsets
2035                   %h   height
2036                   %i   input filename
2037                   %k   number of unique colors
2038                   %l   label
2039                   %m   magick
2040                   %n   number of scenes
2041                   %o   output filename
2042                   %p   page number
2043                   %q   image bit depth
2044                   %r   image type description
2045                   %s   scene number
2046                   %t   top of filename
2047                   %u   unique temporary filename
2048                   %w   width
2049                   %x   horizontal resolution
2050                   %y   vertical resolution
2051                   %A   transparency supported
2052                   %C   compression type
2053                   %D   GIF disposal method
2054                   %G   Original width and height
2055                   %H   page height
2056                   %M   original filename specification
2057                   %O   page offset (x,y)
2058                   %P   page dimensions (width,height)
2059                   %Q   compression quality
2060                   %T   time delay (in centi-seconds)
2061                   %U   resolution units
2062                   %W   page width
2063                   %X   page horizontal offset (x)
2064                   %Y   page vertical offset (y)
2065                   %@   trim bounding box
2066                   %#   signature
2067                   \n   newline
2068                   \r   carriage return
2069                   %%   %
2070
2071              For example,
2072
2073                   -format "%m:%f %wx%h"
2074
2075              displays  MIFF:bird.miff  512x480  for an image titled bird.miff
2076              and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
2077
2078              If the first character of string is @, the format is read from a
2079              file  titled  by the remaining characters in the string.  Please
2080              note that if the string comes from an untrusted source  that  it
2081              should  be sanitized before use since this may be used to incor‐
2082              porate any readable file on the system (a security risk).
2083
2084              The values of image type (%r) which may be returned include:
2085
2086                   Bilevel
2087                   Grayscale
2088                   GrayscaleMatte
2089                   Palette
2090                   PaletteMatte
2091                   TrueColor
2092                   TrueColorMatte
2093                   ColorSeparation
2094                   ColorSeparationMatte
2095                   Optimize
2096
2097              You can also use the  following  special  formatting  syntax  to
2098              print Exif information contained in the file:
2099
2100                   %[EXIF:<tag>]
2101
2102              Where "<tag>" may be one of the following:
2103
2104                   *  (print all Exif tags, in keyword=data format)
2105                   !  (print all Exif tags, in tag_number format)
2106                   #hhhh (print data for Exif tag #hhhh)
2107                   ImageWidth
2108                   ImageLength
2109                   BitsPerSample
2110                   Compression
2111                   PhotometricInterpretation
2112                   FillOrder
2113                   DocumentName
2114                   ImageDescription
2115                   Make
2116                   Model
2117                   StripOffsets
2118                   Orientation
2119                   SamplesPerPixel
2120                   RowsPerStrip
2121                   StripByteCounts
2122                   XResolution
2123                   YResolution
2124                   PlanarConfiguration
2125                   ResolutionUnit
2126                   TransferFunction
2127                   Software
2128                   DateTime
2129                   Artist
2130                   WhitePoint
2131                   PrimaryChromaticities
2132                   TransferRange
2133                   JPEGProc
2134                   JPEGInterchangeFormat
2135                   JPEGInterchangeFormatLength
2136                   YCbCrCoefficients
2137                   YCbCrSubSampling
2138                   YCbCrPositioning
2139                   ReferenceBlackWhite
2140                   CFARepeatPatternDim
2141                   CFAPattern
2142                   BatteryLevel
2143                   Copyright
2144                   ExposureTime
2145                   FNumber
2146                   IPTC/NAA
2147                   ExifOffset
2148                   InterColorProfile
2149                   ExposureProgram
2150                   SpectralSensitivity
2151                   GPSInfo
2152                   ISOSpeedRatings
2153                   OECF
2154                   ExifVersion
2155                   DateTimeOriginal
2156                   DateTimeDigitized
2157                   ComponentsConfiguration
2158                   CompressedBitsPerPixel
2159                   ShutterSpeedValue
2160                   ApertureValue
2161                   BrightnessValue
2162                   ExposureBiasValue
2163                   MaxApertureValue
2164                   SubjectDistance
2165                   MeteringMode
2166                   LightSource
2167                   Flash
2168                   FocalLength
2169                   MakerNote
2170                   UserComment
2171                   SubSecTime
2172                   SubSecTimeOriginal
2173                   SubSecTimeDigitized
2174                   FlashPixVersion
2175                   ColorSpace
2176                   ExifImageWidth
2177                   ExifImageLength
2178                   InteroperabilityOffset
2179                   FlashEnergy
2180                   SpatialFrequencyResponse
2181                   FocalPlaneXResolution
2182                   FocalPlaneYResolution
2183                   FocalPlaneResolutionUnit
2184                   SubjectLocation
2185                   ExposureIndex
2186                   SensingMethod
2187                   FileSource
2188                   SceneType
2189
2190              JPEG  specific information (from reading a JPEG file) may be ob‐
2191              tained like this:
2192
2193                   %[JPEG-<tag>]
2194
2195              Where "<tag>" may be one of the following:
2196
2197                   *                 (all JPEG-related tags, in
2198                                      keyword=data format)
2199                   Quality           IJG JPEG "quality" estimate
2200                   Colorspace        JPEG colorspace numeric ID
2201                   Colorspace-Name   JPEG colorspace name
2202                   Sampling-factors  JPEG sampling factors
2203
2204              Please note that JPEG has no notion of "quality"  and  that  the
2205              quality  metric  used by, and estimated by the software is based
2206              on the quality metric established by IJG  JPEG  6b.   Other  en‐
2207              coders  (e.g. that used by Adobe Photoshop) use different encod‐
2208              ing metrics.
2209
2210              Surround the format specification with quotation marks  to  pre‐
2211              vent  your  shell  from  misinterpreting  any  spaces and square
2212              brackets.
2213
2214       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
2215              surround the image with an ornamental border
2216
2217              See -geometry for details about the geometry specification.  The
2218              -frame option is not affected by the -gravity option.
2219
2220              The  color  of the border is specified with the -mattecolor com‐
2221              mand line option.
2222
2223       -frame include the X window frame in the imported image
2224
2225       -fuzz <distance>{%}
2226              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
2227
2228              A number of algorithms search for a target color. By default the
2229              color  must  be  exact. Use this option to match colors that are
2230              close (in Euclidean distance) to the  target  color  in  RGB  3D
2231              space.  For example, if you want to automatically trim the edges
2232              of an image with -trim but the image was scanned and the  target
2233              background  color  may differ by a small amount. This option can
2234              account for these differences.
2235
2236              The distance can be in absolute intensity units or, by appending
2237              "%",  as  a  percentage  of the maximum possible intensity (255,
2238              65535, or 4294967295).
2239
2240       -gamma <value>
2241              level of gamma correction
2242
2243              The same color image displayed on two different workstations may
2244              look  different  due  to differences in the display monitor. Use
2245              gamma correction to adjust for this color difference. Reasonable
2246              values  extend  from 0.8 to 2.3. Gamma less than 1.0 darkens the
2247              image and gamma greater than 1.0 lightens it. Large  adjustments
2248              to  image gamma may result in the loss of some image information
2249              if the pixel quantum size is only eight bits (quantum range 0 to
2250              255).
2251
2252              You  can apply separate gamma values to the red, green, and blue
2253              channels of the image with a gamma  value  list  delimited  with
2254              slashes (e.g., 1.7/2.3/1.2).
2255
2256              Use  +gamma  value to set the image gamma level without actually
2257              adjusting the image pixels. This option is useful if  the  image
2258              is  of a known gamma but not set as an image attribute (e.g. PNG
2259              images).
2260
2261       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
2262              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
2263
2264              Use the given radius and standard deviation (sigma).
2265
2266       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
2267              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
2268
2269              The -geometry option is used for a number of different purposes,
2270              depending on the utility it is used with.
2271
2272              For  the  X11  commands ('animate', 'display', and 'import'), it
2273              specifies the preferred size and location of the  Image  window.
2274              By  default,  the window size is the image size and the location
2275              is chosen by you (or your window manager) when it is mapped.
2276               For the 'import', 'convert', 'mogrify' utility commands it  may
2277              be  used to specify the desired size when resizing an image.  In
2278              this case, symbols representing resize options may  be  appended
2279              to  the  geometry  string to influence how the resize request is
2280              treated.
2281
2282              See later notes corresponding to usage by  particular  commands.
2283              The following notes apply to when -geometry is used to express a
2284              resize request, taking into account the  current  properties  of
2285              the image.
2286
2287              By  default,  the  width and height are maximum values. That is,
2288              the image is expanded or contracted to fit the width and  height
2289              value while maintaining the aspect ratio of the image.
2290
2291              Append  a  ^  to  the geometry so that the image aspect ratio is
2292              maintained when the image is resized, but the resulting width or
2293              height are treated as minimum values rather than maximum values.
2294
2295              Append  a ! (exclamation point) to the geometry to force the im‐
2296              age size to exactly the size you specify. For  example,  if  you
2297              specify 640x480! the image width is set to 640 pixels and height
2298              to 480.
2299
2300              If only the width is specified, without the trailing  'x',  then
2301              height  is set to width (e.g., -geometry 100 is the same as -ge‐
2302              ometry 100x100).  If only the width is specified  but  with  the
2303              trailing  'x',  then  width  assumes the value and the height is
2304              chosen to maintain the aspect ratio of the image.  Similarly, if
2305              only  the  height  is specified prefixed by 'x' (e.g., -geometry
2306              x256), the width is chosen to maintain the aspect ratio.
2307
2308              To specify a percentage width or height instead, append  %.  The
2309              image  size is multiplied by the width and height percentages to
2310              obtain the final image dimensions. To increase the  size  of  an
2311              image,  use a value greater than 100 (e.g. 125%). To decrease an
2312              image's size, use a percentage less than 100.
2313
2314              Use @ to specify the maximum area in pixels of an image.
2315
2316              Use > to change the dimensions of the image only if its width or
2317              height  exceeds  the geometry specification. < resizes the image
2318              only if both of its dimensions are less than the geometry speci‐
2319              fication.  For  example, if you specify '640x480>' and the image
2320              size is 256x256, the image size does not change. However, if the
2321              image  is  512x512  or 1024x1024, it is resized to 480x480.  En‐
2322              close the geometry specification in quotation marks  to  prevent
2323              the  < or > from being interpreted by your shell as a file redi‐
2324              rection.
2325
2326              When used with animate and display, offsets are handled  in  the
2327              same  manner as in X(1) and the -gravity option is not used.  If
2328              the x is negative, the offset  is  measured  leftward  from  the
2329              right  edge  of  the screen to the right edge of the image being
2330              displayed.  Similarly, negative y is measured between the bottom
2331              edges.   The  offsets  are  not affected by "%"; they are always
2332              measured in pixels.
2333
2334              When used as a composite option, -geometry gives the  dimensions
2335              of  the image and its location with respect to the composite im‐
2336              age.  If the -gravity option is present with NorthEast, East, or
2337              SouthEast  gravity, the x represents the distance from the right
2338              edge of the image to the right  edge  of  the  composite  image.
2339              Similarly,  if  the  -gravity  option is present with SouthWest,
2340              South, or SouthEast gravity, y is measured  between  the  bottom
2341              edges.  Accordingly,  a  positive offset will never point in the
2342              direction outside of the image.  The offsets are not affected by
2343              "%";  they are always measured in pixels.  To specify the dimen‐
2344              sions of the composite image, use the -resize option.
2345
2346              When used as a convert, import or mogrify option,  -geometry  is
2347              synonymous with -resize and specifies the size of the output im‐
2348              age.  The offsets, if present, are ignored.
2349
2350              When used as a montage option,  -geometry  specifies  the  image
2351              size  and  border  size  for  each tile; default is 256x256+0+0.
2352              Negative  offsets  (border  dimensions)  are  meaningless.   The
2353              -gravity  option  affects  the placement of the image within the
2354              tile; the default gravity for this purpose is  Center.   If  the
2355              "%" sign appears in the geometry specification, the tile size is
2356              the specified percentage of the original dimensions of the first
2357              tile.  To specify the dimensions of the montage, use the -resize
2358              option.
2359
2360       -gravity <type>
2361              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
2362
2363              Choices are: NorthWest, North, NorthEast,  West,  Center,  East,
2364              SouthWest, South, SouthEast.
2365
2366              The  direction  you  choose specifies where to position the text
2367              when annotating the image. For example Center gravity forces the
2368              text  to  be  centered  within  the image. By default, the image
2369              gravity is NorthWest.  See -draw for more details about  graphic
2370              primitives.  Only the text primitive is affected by the -gravity
2371              option.
2372
2373              The -gravity option is also used in concert with  the  -geometry
2374              option  and  other  options that take <geometry> as a parameter,
2375              such as the -crop option.  See -geometry for details of how  the
2376              -gravity  option  interacts with the <x> and <y> parameters of a
2377              geometry specification.
2378
2379              When used as an option to composite, -gravity gives  the  direc‐
2380              tion that the image gravitates within the composite.
2381
2382              When  used as an option to montage, -gravity gives the direction
2383              that an image gravitates within a tile.  The default gravity  is
2384              Center for this purpose.
2385
2386       -green-primary <x>,<y>
2387              green chromaticity primary point
2388
2389       -hald-clut <clut>
2390              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
2391
2392              A  Hald  CLUT  ("Color Look-Up Table") is a special square color
2393              image which contains a look-up table for red, green,  and  blue.
2394              The size of the Hald CLUT image is determined by its order.  The
2395              width (and height) of a Hald CLUT is the cube of the order.  For
2396              example,  a Hald CLUT of order 8 is 512x512 pixels (262,144 col‐
2397              ors) and of order 16 is 4096x4096 (16,777,216 colors).   A  spe‐
2398              cial  CLUT  is the identity CLUT which which causes no change to
2399              the input image.  In order to use the Hald CLUT,  one  takes  an
2400              identity  CLUT and adjusts its colors in some way.  The modified
2401              CLUT can then be used to transform any number of  images  in  an
2402              identical way.
2403
2404              GraphicsMagick  contains  a built-in identity CLUT generator via
2405              the IDENTITY coder.  For example  reading  from  the  file  name
2406              IDENTITY:8  returns  an  identity CLUT of order 8.  Typical Hald
2407              CLUT identity images have an order of between 8 and 16.  The de‐
2408              fault order for the IDENTITY CLUT generator is 8.  Interpolation
2409              is used so it is not usually necessary for  CLUT  images  to  be
2410              very  large.  The PNG file format is ideal for storing Hald CLUT
2411              images because it compresses them very well.
2412
2413       -help  print usage instructions
2414
2415       -highlight-color <color>
2416              pixel annotation color
2417
2418              Specifies the color to use when annotating difference pixels.
2419
2420       -highlight-style <style>
2421              pixel annotation style
2422
2423              Specifies the pixel difference annotation style used to draw at‐
2424              tention  to  changed  pixels.  May  be one of Assign, Threshold,
2425              Tint, or XOR; where Assign replaces the pixel with the highlight
2426              color  (see -highlight-color), Threshold replaces the pixel with
2427              black or white based on the difference in intensity, Tint  alpha
2428              tints  the  pixel  with the highlight color, and XOR does an XOR
2429              between the pixel and the highlight color.
2430
2431       -iconGeometry <geometry>
2432              specify the icon geometry
2433
2434              Offsets, if present in the geometry specification,  are  handled
2435              in  the  same manner as the -geometry option, using X11 style to
2436              handle negative offsets.
2437
2438       -iconic
2439              iconic animation
2440
2441       -immutable
2442              make image immutable
2443
2444       -implode <factor>
2445              implode image pixels about the center
2446
2447       -intent <type>
2448              use this type of rendering intent when managing the image color
2449
2450              Use this option to affect the the color management operation  of
2451              an  image  (see -profile).  Choose from these intents: Absolute,
2452              Perceptual, Relative, Saturation.
2453
2454              The default intent is undefined.
2455
2456       -interlace <type>
2457              the type of interlacing scheme
2458
2459              Choices are: None, Line, Plane, or  Partition.  The  default  is
2460              None.
2461
2462              This  option  is  used to specify the type of interlacing scheme
2463              for raw image formats such as RGB or YUV.  None means do not in‐
2464              terlace (RGBRGBRGBRGBRGBRGB...),
2465
2466              Line             uses            scanline            interlacing
2467              (RRR...GGG...BBB...RRR...GGG...BBB...), and Plane uses plane in‐
2468              terlacing (RRRRRR...GGGGGG...BBBBBB...).
2469
2470              Partition is like plane except the different planes are saved to
2471              individual files (e.g. image.R, image.G, and image.B).
2472
2473              Use Line to create an interlaced PNG or  GIF or progressive JPEG
2474              image.
2475
2476       -label <name>
2477              assign a label to an image
2478
2479              Use  this  option  to assign a specific label to the image, when
2480              writing to an image format that supports labels, such  as  TIFF,
2481              PNG,  MIFF,  or  PostScript. You can include the the image file‐
2482              name, type, width, height, or other image attribute by embedding
2483              special  format  character.   A label is not drawn on the image,
2484              but is embedded in the image datastream via  a  "Label"  tag  or
2485              similar  mechanism.   If you want the label to be visible on the
2486              image itself, use the -draw option.  See -comment for details.
2487
2488              For example,
2489
2490                   -label "%m:%f %wx%h"
2491
2492              produces an image label of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for  an  image
2493              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
2494
2495              If  the  first character of string is @, the image label is read
2496              from a file titled by the remaining characters  in  the  string.
2497              Please  note  that  if the string comes from an untrusted source
2498              that it should be sanitized before use since otherwise the  con‐
2499              tent  of  an  arbitrary readable file might be incorporated into
2500              the image label (a security risk).
2501
2502              If the -label option appears multiple times, only the last label
2503              is stored.
2504
2505              In  PNG images, the label is stored in a tEXt or zTXt chunk with
2506              the keyword "label".
2507
2508              When converting to PostScript, use  this  option  to  specify  a
2509              header  string  to print above the image. Specify the label font
2510              with -font.
2511
2512              When creating a montage, by default the label associated with an
2513              image  is  displayed with the corresponding tile in the montage.
2514              Use the +label option to suppress this behavior.
2515
2516
2517
2518       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
2519              perform local adaptive thresholding
2520
2521              Perform local adaptive thresholding using the  specified  width,
2522              height,  and  offset.   The offset is a distance in sample space
2523              from the mean, as an absolute integer ranging from 0 to the max‐
2524              imum  sample value or as a percentage.  If the percent option is
2525              supplied, then the offset is computed as  a  percentage  of  the
2526              quantum  range.   It  is strongly recommended to use the percent
2527              option so that results are not sensitive to pixel quantum depth.
2528
2529              For example,
2530
2531                   -colorspace gray -lat "10x10-5%"
2532
2533              will help clarify a scanned grayscale or color document, produc‐
2534              ing a bi-level equivalent.
2535
2536       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
2537              adjust the level of image contrast
2538
2539              Give  one,  two  or  three  values delimited with commas: black-
2540              point, gamma, white-point (e.g. 10,1.0,250 or  2%,0.5,98%).  The
2541              black and white points range from 0 to MaxRGB or from 0 to 100%;
2542              if the white point is omitted it is set  to  MaxRGB-black_point.
2543              If  a  "%" sign is present anywhere in the string, the black and
2544              white points are percentages of MaxRGB.  Gamma  is  an  exponent
2545              that  ranges  from  0.1 to 10.; if it is omitted, the default of
2546              1.0 (no gamma correction) is assumed. This interface works simi‐
2547              lar  to Photoshop's "Image->Adjustments->Levels..."  "Input Lev‐
2548              els" interface.
2549
2550       -limit <type> <value>
2551              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
2552              resource limit
2553
2554              By default, resource limits are estimated based on the available
2555              resources and capabilities of the system.  The  resource  limits
2556              are  Disk, maximum total disk space consumed; File, maximum num‐
2557              ber of file descriptors allowed to be open at once; Map, maximum
2558              total  number  of file bytes which may be memory mapped; Memory,
2559              maximum total number of bytes of  heap  memory  used  for  image
2560              storage; Pixels, maximum absolute image size (per image); Width,
2561              maximum image pixels width; Height, maximum image pixels height;
2562              Read, maximum number of uncompressed bytes to read; and Threads,
2563              the maximum number of worker threads to use  per  OpenMP  thread
2564              team.
2565
2566              The  Disk  and  Map resource limits are used to decide if (for a
2567              given image) the decoded image ("pixel cache") should be  stored
2568              in heap memory (RAM), in a memory-mapped disk file, or in a disk
2569              file accessed via read/write I/O.
2570
2571              The number of total pixels in one  image  (Pixels),  and/or  the
2572              width/height  (Width/Height),  may  be limited in order to force
2573              the reading, or creation of images larger  than  the  limit  (in
2574              pixels) to intentionally fail. The disk limit (Disk) establishes
2575              an overall limit since using the disk is the means of  last  re‐
2576              sort.  When  the disk limit has been reached, no more images may
2577              be read.
2578
2579              The amount of uncompressed data read when reading one image  may
2580              be  limited by the Read limit.  Reading the image fails when the
2581              limit is hit.  This option is useful if the data is read from  a
2582              stream  (pipe) or from a compressed file such as a gzipped file.
2583              Some files are very compressable and so a small compressed  file
2584              can  decompress  to a huge amount of data.  This option also de‐
2585              fends against files which produce seemingly endless loops  while
2586              decoding by seeking backwards in the file.
2587
2588              The  value  argument is an absolute value, but may have standard
2589              binary suffix characters applied ('K', 'M', 'G', 'T', 'P',  'E')
2590              to apply a scaling to the value (based on a multiplier of 1024).
2591              Any additional characters are ignored. For example, '-limit Pix‐
2592              els  10MP'  limits  the  maximum image size to 10 megapixels and
2593              '-limit memory 32MB -limit map 64MB' limits  memory  and  memory
2594              mapped files to 32 megabytes and 64 megabytes respectively.
2595
2596              Resource limits may also be set using environment variables. The
2597              environment  variables  MAGICK_LIMIT_DISK,   MAGICK_LIMIT_FILES,
2598              MAGICK_LIMIT_MAP, MAGICK_LIMIT_MEMORY, MAGICK_LIMIT_PIXELS, MAG‐
2599              ICK_LIMIT_WIDTH,  MAGICK_LIMIT_HEIGHT.   MAGICK_LIMIT_READ,  and
2600              OMP_NUM_THREADS  may  be  used to set the limits for disk space,
2601              open files, memory mapped size, heap memory,  per-image  pixels,
2602              image width, image height, and threads respectively.
2603
2604              Use the option -list resource list the current limits.
2605
2606       -linewidth
2607              the line width for subsequent draw operations
2608
2609       -list <type>
2610              the type of list
2611
2612              Choices  are:  Color, Delegate, Format, Magic, Module, Resource,
2613              or Type. The Module option is only available  if  GraphicsMagick
2614              was built to support loadable modules.
2615
2616              This  option lists information about the GraphicsMagick configu‐
2617              ration.
2618
2619       -log <string>
2620              Specify format for debug log
2621
2622              This option specifies the format for the log  printed  when  the
2623              -debug option is active.
2624
2625              You  can  display  the following components by embedding special
2626              format characters:
2627
2628                   %d   domain
2629                   %e   event
2630                   %f   function
2631                   %l   line
2632                   %m   module
2633                   %p   process ID
2634                   %r   real CPU time
2635                   %t   wall clock time
2636                   %u   user CPU time
2637                   %%   percent sign
2638                   \n   newline
2639                   \r   carriage return
2640
2641              For example:
2642
2643                  gm convert -debug coders -log "%u %m:%l %e" in.gif out.png
2644
2645              The default behavior is to print all of the components.
2646
2647       -loop <iterations>
2648              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
2649
2650              A value other than zero forces the animation to repeat itself up
2651              to iterations times.
2652
2653       -magnify
2654              magnify the image
2655
2656              The image size is doubled using linear interpolation.
2657
2658       -magnify <factor>
2659              magnify the image
2660
2661              The displayed image is magnified by factor.
2662
2663       -map <filename>
2664              choose a particular set of colors from this image
2665
2666              [convert or mogrify]
2667
2668              By  default,  color  reduction  chooses an optimal set of colors
2669              that best represent the original image. Alternatively,  you  can
2670              choose  a  particular set of colors from an image file with this
2671              option.
2672
2673              Use +map to reduce all images in the image sequence that follows
2674              to  a  single  optimal set of colors that best represent all the
2675              images.  The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance
2676              of  any option.  If the +map option appears after all of the in‐
2677              put images, all images are mapped.
2678
2679       -map <type>
2680              display image using this type.
2681
2682              [animate or display]
2683
2684              Choose from these Standard Colormap types:
2685
2686                   best
2687                   default
2688                   gray
2689                   red
2690                   green
2691                   blue
2692
2693              The X server must support the Standard Colormap you choose, oth‐
2694              erwise  an  error  occurs.  Use  list  as  the  type and display
2695              searches the list of colormap types in top-to-bottom order until
2696              one is located. See xstdcmap(1) for one way of creating Standard
2697              Colormaps.
2698
2699       -mask <filename>
2700              Specify a clipping mask
2701
2702              The image read from the file is used as  a  clipping  mask.   It
2703              must have the same dimensions as the image being masked.
2704
2705              If  the  mask  image contains an opacity channel, the opacity of
2706              each pixel is used to define the mask.  Otherwise, the intensity
2707              (gray level) of each pixel is used.  Unmasked (black) pixels are
2708              modified while masked pixels (not black) are protected from  al‐
2709              teration.
2710
2711              Use +mask to remove the clipping mask.
2712
2713              It  is not necessary to use -clip to activate the mask; -clip is
2714              implied by -mask.
2715
2716       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
2717
2718              If the image does not have a matte  channel,  create  an  opaque
2719              one.
2720
2721              Use +matte to ignore the matte channel (treats it as opaque) and
2722              to avoid writing a matte channel in the output file.
2723
2724              For the compare command, -matte will add an opaque matte channel
2725              to images if they do not already have a matte channel, and matte
2726              will be enabled for both images.  Likewise, if +matte  is  used,
2727              the  matte  channel  is disabled for both images.  This makes it
2728              easier to compare images regardless of if they  already  have  a
2729              matte channel.
2730
2731       -mattecolor <color>
2732              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
2733
2734              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
2735              -fill option.
2736
2737       -maximum-error <limit>
2738              specifies the maximum amount of total image error
2739
2740              Specifies the maximum amount of total image error (based on com‐
2741              parison  using  a specified metric) before an error ("image dif‐
2742              ference exceeds limit") is reported.  The error is reported  via
2743              a non-zero command execution return status.
2744
2745       -median <radius>
2746              apply a median filter to the image
2747
2748       -metric <metric>
2749              comparison metric (MAE, MSE, PAE, PSNR, RMSE)
2750
2751       -minify <factor>
2752              minify the image
2753
2754              The image size is halved using linear interpolation.
2755
2756       -mode <value>
2757              mode of operation
2758
2759              The  available  montage modes are frame to place the images in a
2760              rectangular grid while adding  a  decorative  frame  with  drop‐
2761              shadow,  unframe  to  place  undecorated images in a rectangular
2762              grid, and concatenate to pack the images closely together  with‐
2763              out any well-defined grid or decoration.
2764
2765       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
2766              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
2767
2768              Specify  the percent change in brightness, color saturation, and
2769              hue separated by commas. Default argument values  are  100  per‐
2770              cent, resulting in no change. For example, to increase the color
2771              brightness by 20% and decrease the color saturation by  10%  and
2772              leave the hue unchanged, use: -modulate 120,90.
2773
2774              Hue  is the percentage of absolute rotation from the current po‐
2775              sition. For example 50 results in a  counter-clockwise  rotation
2776              of  90  degrees,  150  results in a clockwise rotation of 90 de‐
2777              grees, with 0 and 200 both resulting in a rotation  of  180  de‐
2778              grees.
2779
2780       -monitor
2781              show progress indication
2782
2783              A  simple  command-line  progress  indication is shown while the
2784              command is running. The process indication shows  the  operation
2785              currently  being  performed  and the percent completed. Commands
2786              using X11 may replace the command line progress indication  with
2787              a graphical one once an image has been displayed.
2788
2789       -monochrome
2790              transform the image to black and white
2791
2792       -morph <frames>
2793              morphs an image sequence
2794
2795              Both the image pixels and size are linearly interpolated to give
2796              the appearance of a meta-morphosis from one image to the next.
2797
2798              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
2799              option.  If the -morph option appears after all of the input im‐
2800              ages, all images are morphed.
2801
2802       -mosaic
2803              create a mosaic from an image or an image sequence
2804
2805              The -mosaic option provides a flexible way to composite  one  or
2806              more images onto a solid-color canvas image. It works similar to
2807              -flatten except that a base canvas image is  automatically  cre‐
2808              ated with a suitable size given the image size, page dimensions,
2809              and page offsets of images to be composited.  The color  of  the
2810              base  canvas  image  may be set via the -background option.  The
2811              default canvas color is 'white', but  'black'  or  'transparent'
2812              may  be more suitable depending on the composition algorithm re‐
2813              quested.
2814
2815              The -compose option may be used to specify the composition algo‐
2816              rithm  to  use when compositing the subsequent image on the base
2817              canvas.
2818
2819              The -page option can be used to establish the dimensions of  the
2820              mosaic  and  to position the subsequent image within the mosaic.
2821              If the -page argument does not specify width  and  height,  then
2822              the canvas dimensions are evaluated based on the image sizes and
2823              offsets.
2824
2825              The sequence of images is terminated by the  appearance  of  any
2826              option.   If  the  -mosaic option appears after all of the input
2827              images, all images are included in the mosaic.
2828
2829              The following is an example of composing an image based on  red,
2830              green,  and  blue layers extracted from a sequence of images and
2831              pasted on the canvas image at specified offsets:
2832
2833                  gm convert -background black \
2834                            -compose CopyRed   -page +0-100 red.png \
2835                            -compose CopyGreen -page +0+40  green.png \
2836                            -compose CopyBlue  -page +0+180 blue.png \
2837                            -mosaic output.png
2838
2839       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
2840              Simulate motion blur
2841
2842              Simulate motion blur by convolving the image with a Gaussian op‐
2843              erator  of  the given radius and standard deviation (sigma). For
2844              reasonable results, radius should be larger than sigma.  If  ra‐
2845              dius  is  zero, then a suitable radius is automatically selected
2846              based on sigma. The angle specifies the angle that the object is
2847              coming from (side which is blurred).
2848
2849       -name  name an image
2850
2851       -negate
2852              replace every pixel with its complementary color
2853
2854              The  red,  green,  and blue intensities of an image are negated.
2855              White becomes black, yellow becomes blue, etc.  Use  +negate  to
2856              only negate the grayscale pixels of the image.
2857
2858       -noise <radius|type>
2859              add or reduce noise in an image
2860
2861              The  principal  function  of noise peak elimination filter is to
2862              smooth the objects within an image without losing edge  informa‐
2863              tion and without creating undesired structures. The central idea
2864              of the algorithm is to replace a pixel with its next neighbor in
2865              value  within a pixel window, if this pixel has been found to be
2866              noise. A pixel is defined as noise if and only if this pixel  is
2867              a maximum or minimum within the pixel window.
2868
2869              Use radius to specify the width of the neighborhood.
2870
2871              Use  +noise  followed  by a noise type to add noise to an image.
2872              The noise added modulates the existing image pixels. Choose from
2873              these noise types:
2874
2875                   Uniform
2876                   Gaussian
2877                   Multiplicative
2878                   Impulse
2879                   Laplacian
2880                   Poisson
2881                   Random (uniform distribution)
2882
2883       -noop  NOOP (no option)
2884
2885              The  -noop option can be used to terminate a group of images and
2886              reset all options to their default values, when no other  option
2887              is desired.
2888
2889       -normalize
2890              transform image to span the full range of color values
2891
2892              This is a contrast enhancement technique based on the image his‐
2893              togram.
2894
2895              When computing the contrast enhancement  values,  the  histogram
2896              edges are truncated so that the majority of the image pixels are
2897              considered in the constrast enhancement, and outliers (e.g. ran‐
2898              dom  noise  or minute details) are ignored.  The default is that
2899              0.1 percent of the histogram entries are ignored.  The  percent‐
2900              age  of  the  histogram  to ignore may be specified by using the
2901              -set option with the histogram-threshold  parameter  similar  to
2902              -set  histogram-threshold  0.01  to specify 0.01 percent.  Use 0
2903              percent to use the entire histogram,  with  possibly  diminished
2904              contrast enhancement.
2905
2906       -opaque <color>
2907              change this color to the pen color within the image
2908
2909              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
2910              -fill option.  The color is replaced if it is identical  to  the
2911              target  color, or close enough to the target color in a 3D space
2912              as defined by the Euclidean distance specified by -fuzz.
2913
2914              See -fill and -fuzz for more details.
2915
2916       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
2917              apply a mathematical, bitwise, or value  operator  to  an  image
2918              channel
2919
2920              Apply  a low-level mathematical, bitwise, or value operator to a
2921              selected image channel or all image channels.  Operations  which
2922              result  in  negative  results  are reset to zero, and operations
2923              which overflow the available range are reset to the maximum pos‐
2924              sible value.
2925
2926              Select  a  channel from: Red, Green, Blue, Opacity, Matte, Cyan,
2927              Magenta, Yellow, Black, All, or  Gray.  All  only  modifies  the
2928              color  channels  and does not modify the Opacity channel. Except
2929              for the threshold operators, All operates on each channel  inde‐
2930              pendently so that operations are on a per-channel basis.
2931
2932              Gray treats the color channels as a grayscale intensity and per‐
2933              forms the requested operation on the equivalent pixel  intensity
2934              so  the  result  is  a gray image.  Select an operator from Add,
2935              And, Assign, Depth, Divide, Gamma,  Negate,  LShift,  Log,  Max,
2936              Min,  Multiply, Or, Pow, RShift, Subtract, Threshold, Threshold-
2937              White, Threshold-White-Negate, Threshold-Black, Threshold-Black-
2938              Negate,  Xor,  Noise-Gaussian,  Noise-Impulse,  Noise-Laplacian,
2939              Noise-Multiplicative, Noise-Poisson,  Noise-Random,  and  Noise-
2940              Uniform.
2941
2942              Rvalue  may  be  any  floating  point or integer value. Normally
2943              rvalue will be in the range of 0 to MaxRGB, where MaxRGB is  the
2944              largest  quantum  value  supported  by  the GraphicsMagick build
2945              (255, 65535, or 4294967295) but values outside  this  range  are
2946              useful  for some arithmetic operations.  Arguments to logical or
2947              bit-wise operations are rounded to  a  positive  integral  value
2948              prior  to  use. If a percent (%) symbol is appended to the argu‐
2949              ment, then the argument has a range of 0 to 100 percent.
2950
2951              The following is a description of the operators:
2952
2953
2954               Add
2955
2956                    Result is rvalue added to channel value.
2957
2958               And
2959
2960                    Result is the logical AND of rvalue with channel value.
2961
2962               Assign
2963
2964                    Result is rvalue.
2965
2966               Depth
2967
2968                    Result is channel value adjusted so that it  may  be  (ap‐
2969                    proximately)  stored in the specified number of bits with‐
2970                    out additional loss.
2971
2972               Divide
2973
2974                    Result is channel value divided by rvalue.
2975
2976               Gamma
2977
2978                    Result is channel value gamma adjusted by rvalue.
2979
2980               LShift
2981
2982                    Result is channel value bitwise  left  shifted  by  rvalue
2983                    bits.
2984
2985               Log
2986
2987                    Result is computed as log(value*rvalue+1)/log(rvalue+1).
2988
2989               Max
2990
2991                    Result  is  assigned  to  rvalue if rvalue is greater than
2992                    value.
2993
2994               Min
2995
2996                    Result is assigned to rvalue if rvalue is less than value.
2997
2998               Multiply
2999
3000                    Result is channel value multiplied by rvalue.
3001
3002               Negate
3003
3004                    Result is inverse of channel value (like a film negative).
3005                    An  rvalue must be supplied but is currently not used. In‐
3006                    verting the image twice results in the original image.
3007
3008               Or
3009
3010                    Result is the logical OR of rvalue with channel value.
3011
3012               Pow
3013
3014                    Result is computed as pow(value,rvalue). Similar to  Gamma
3015                    except that rvalue is not inverted.
3016
3017               RShift
3018
3019                    Result  is  channel  value bitwise right shifted by rvalue
3020                    bits.
3021
3022               Subtract
3023
3024                    Result is channel value minus rvalue.
3025
3026               Threshold
3027
3028                    Result is maximum (white) if channel value is greater than
3029                    rvalue,  or minimum (black) if it is less than or equal to
3030                    rvalue. If all channels are specified,  then  thresholding
3031                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3032
3033               Threshold-white
3034
3035                    Result is maximum (white) if channel value is greater than
3036                    rvalue and is unchanged if it is less  than  or  equal  to
3037                    rvalue. This can be used to remove apparent noise from the
3038                    bright parts of an image. If all channels  are  specified,
3039                    then  thresholding  is done based on computed pixel inten‐
3040                    sity.
3041
3042               Threshold-White-Negate
3043
3044                    Result is set to black if channel value  is  greater  than
3045                    rvalue  and  is  unchanged  if it is less than or equal to
3046                    rvalue. If all channels are specified,  then  thresholding
3047                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3048
3049               Threshold-black
3050
3051                    Result  is  minimum  (black) if channel value is less than
3052                    than rvalue and is unchanged if  it  is  greater  than  or
3053                    equal to rvalue. This can be used to remove apparent noise
3054                    from the dark parts of an image. If all channels are spec‐
3055                    ified,  then  thresholding is done based on computed pixel
3056                    intensity.
3057
3058               Threshold-Black-Negate
3059
3060                    Result is set to white if channel value is less than  than
3061                    rvalue  and is unchanged if it is greater than or equal to
3062                    rvalue. If all channels are specified,  then  thresholding
3063                    is done based on computed pixel intensity.
3064
3065               Xor
3066
3067                    Result is the logical XOR of rvalue with channel value. An
3068                    interesting property of XOR is that  performing  the  same
3069                    operation twice results in the original value.
3070
3071               Noise-Gaussian
3072
3073                    Result  is the current channel value modulated with gauss‐
3074                    ian noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3075
3076               Noise-Impulse
3077
3078                    Result is the current channel value modulated with impulse
3079                    noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3080
3081               Noise-Laplacian
3082
3083                    Result  is the current channel value modulated with lapla‐
3084                    cian noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3085
3086               Noise-Multiplicative
3087
3088                    Result is the current channel value modulated with  multi‐
3089                    plicative gaussian noise according to the intensity speci‐
3090                    fied by rvalue.
3091
3092               Noise-Poisson
3093
3094                    Result is the current channel value modulated with poisson
3095                    noise according to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3096
3097               Noise-Random
3098
3099                    Result  is the current channel value modulated with random
3100                    (uniform distribution) noise according  to  the  intensity
3101                    specified   by   rvalue.    The  initial  noise  intensity
3102                    (rvalue=1.0) is the range of one pixel quantum span.
3103
3104               Noise-Uniform
3105
3106                    Result is the channel value with uniform noise applied ac‐
3107                    cording to the intensity specified by rvalue.
3108
3109
3110
3111
3112               As  an  example, the Assign operator assigns a fixed value to a
3113               channel. For example, this command sets the red channel to  the
3114               mid-range value:
3115
3116                   gm convert in.bmp -operator red assign "50%" out.bmp
3117
3118               The following applies 50% thresholding to the image and returns
3119               a gray image:
3120
3121                   gm convert in.bmp -operator gray threshold "50%" out.bmp
3122
3123       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
3124              ordered dither the image
3125
3126              The channel or channels specified in  the  channeltype  argument
3127              are  reduced  to  binary,  using  an  ordered dither method. The
3128              choices for channeltype are All, Intensity,  Red,  Green,  Blue,
3129              Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Opacity
3130
3131              When channeltype is "All", the color samples are dithered into a
3132              gray level and then that gray level is stored in the three color
3133              channels.   Separately,  the  opacity channel is dithered into a
3134              bilevel opacity value which is stored in the opacity channel.
3135
3136              When channeltype is "Intensity",  only  the  color  samples  are
3137              dithered.  When  channeltype  is  "opacity" or "matte", only the
3138              opacity channel is dithered. When a color channel is  specified,
3139              only that channel is dithered.
3140
3141              The choices for N are 2 through 7. The image is divided into NxN
3142              pixel tiles.  In each tile, some or all  pixels  are  turned  to
3143              white depending on their intensity.  For each N, (N**2)+1 levels
3144              of gray can be represented.  For N == 2, 3, or 4, the pixels are
3145              turned to white in an order that maximizes dispersion (i.e., re‐
3146              duces granularity), while for N == 5, 6, and 7, they are  turned
3147              to  white in an order that creates a roughly circular black blob
3148              in the middle of each tile.  An attractive  "half-tone"  looking
3149              image  can  be  obtained by first rotating the image 45 degrees,
3150              performing a 5x5 ordered-dither operation, then rotating it back
3151              to  the  original orientation and cropping to the original image
3152              dimensions.  If the original image is gamma-encoded, it  is  ad‐
3153              viseable to convert it to linear intensity first, e.g., with the
3154              "-gamma 0.45455" option.
3155
3156       -output-directory <directory>
3157              output files to directory
3158
3159              Use -output-directory to specify  a  directory  under  which  to
3160              write  the  output  files. Normally mogrify overwrites the input
3161              files, but with this option the output files may be written to a
3162              different  directory tree so that the input files are preserved.
3163              The algorithm used preserves all of the input path specification
3164              in  the  output  path so that the user-specified input path (in‐
3165              cluding any sub-directory part) is appended to the output  path.
3166              If  the input file lacks an extension, then a suitable extension
3167              is automatically added to the output file.  The user is  respon‐
3168              sible  for  creating  the output directory specified as an argu‐
3169              ment, but subdirectories will be created as needed if the  -cre‐
3170              ate-directories  option is supplied.  This option may be used to
3171              apply transformations on files from one directory and write  the
3172              transformed files to a different directory.  In conjunction with
3173              -create-directories, this option is designed to  support  trans‐
3174              forming  whole  directory trees of files provided that the rela‐
3175              tive path of the input file is included  as  part  the  list  of
3176              filenames.
3177
3178       -orient <orientation>
3179              Set the image orientation attribute
3180
3181              Sets the image orientation attribute.  The image orientation at‐
3182              tribute is compatible with the TIFF  orientation  tag  (and  the
3183              EXIF  orientation tag).  Accepted values are undefined, TopLeft,
3184              TopRight, BottomRight, BottomLeft, LeftTop, RightTop,  RightBot‐
3185              tom, LeftBottom, and hyphenated versions thereof (e.g. left-bot‐
3186              tom).  Please note that GraphicsMagick does not include an  EXIF
3187              editor so if an EXIF profile is written to the output image, the
3188              value in the EXIF profile might not match the image.  It is pos‐
3189              sible  for  an image file to indicate its orientation in several
3190              different ways simultaneously.
3191
3192       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
3193              size and location of an image canvas
3194
3195              Use this option to specify the dimensions of the PostScript page
3196              in  dots  per  inch  or a TEXT page in pixels. The choices for a
3197              PostScript page are:
3198
3199                   11x17         792  1224
3200                   Ledger       1224   792
3201                   Legal         612  1008
3202                   Letter        612   792
3203                   LetterSmall   612   792
3204                   ArchE        2592  3456
3205                   ArchD        1728  2592
3206                   ArchC        1296  1728
3207                   ArchB         864  1296
3208                   ArchA         648   864
3209                   A0           2380  3368
3210                   A1           1684  2380
3211                   A2           1190  1684
3212                   A3            842  1190
3213                   A4            595   842
3214                   A4Small       595   842
3215                   A5            421   595
3216                   A6            297   421
3217                   A7            210   297
3218                   A8            148   210
3219                   A9            105   148
3220                   A10            74   105
3221                   B0           2836  4008
3222                   B1           2004  2836
3223                   B2           1418  2004
3224                   B3           1002  1418
3225                   B4            709  1002
3226                   B5            501   709
3227                   C0           2600  3677
3228                   C1           1837  2600
3229                   C2           1298  1837
3230                   C3            918  1298
3231                   C4            649   918
3232                   C5            459   649
3233                   C6            323   459
3234                   Flsa          612   936
3235                   Flse          612   936
3236                   HalfLetter    396   612
3237
3238              For convenience you can specify the page size by media (e.g. A4,
3239              Ledger,  etc.).  Otherwise,  -page  behaves  much like -geometry
3240              (e.g.  -page letter+43+43>).
3241
3242              This option is also used to place subimages when  writing  to  a
3243              multi-image format that supports offsets, such as GIF89 and MNG.
3244              When used for this purpose the offsets are always  measured from
3245              the  top  left  corner of the canvas and are not affected by the
3246              -gravity  option.   To  position  a  GIF  or  MNG   image,   use
3247              -page{+-}<x>{+-}<y>  (e.g.  -page  +100+200).  When writing to a
3248              MNG file, a -page option appearing ahead of the first  image  in
3249              the sequence with nonzero width and height defines the width and
3250              height values that are written in the  MHDR  chunk.   Otherwise,
3251              the MNG width and height are computed from the bounding box that
3252              contains all images in the sequence.  When writing a GIF89 file,
3253              only  the  bounding  box  method is used to determine its dimen‐
3254              sions.
3255
3256              For a PostScript page, the image is sized as  in  -geometry  and
3257              positioned relative to the lower left hand corner of the page by
3258              {+-}<xoffset>{+-}<y offset>. Use -page 612x792>, for example, to
3259              center  the image within the page. If the image size exceeds the
3260              PostScript page, it is reduced to fit  the  page.   The  default
3261              gravity  for the -page option is NorthWest, i.e., positive x and
3262              y offset are measured rightward and downward from the  top  left
3263              corner of the page, unless the -gravity option is present with a
3264              value other than NorthWest.
3265
3266              The default page dimensions for a TEXT image is 612x792.
3267
3268              This option is used in concert with -density.
3269
3270              Use +page to remove the page settings for an image.
3271
3272       -paint <radius>
3273              simulate an oil painting
3274
3275              Each pixel is replaced by the most frequent color in a  circular
3276              neighborhood whose width is specified with radius.
3277
3278       -pause <seconds>
3279              pause between animation loops [animate]
3280
3281              Pause  for  the specified number of seconds before repeating the
3282              animation.
3283
3284       -pause <seconds>
3285              pause between snapshots [import]
3286
3287              Pause for the specified number of seconds before taking the next
3288              snapshot.
3289
3290       -pen <color>
3291              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
3292
3293       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
3294
3295              Use  this option to disable reading the image pixels so that im‐
3296              age characteristics such as the image dimensions may be obtained
3297              very quickly. For identify, use +ping to force reading the image
3298              pixels so that the pixel read rate may be included in  the  dis‐
3299              played information.
3300
3301       -pointsize <value>
3302              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
3303
3304       -preview <type>
3305              image preview type
3306
3307              Use  this  option  to  affect  the preview operation of an image
3308              (e.g.   convert  file.png  -preview  Gamma   Preview:gamma.png).
3309              Choose from these previews:
3310
3311                   Rotate
3312                   Shear
3313                   Roll
3314                   Hue
3315                   Saturation
3316                   Brightness
3317                   Gamma
3318                   Spiff
3319                   Dull
3320                   Grayscale
3321                   Quantize
3322                   Despeckle
3323                   ReduceNoise
3324                   AddNoise
3325                   Sharpen
3326                   Blur
3327                   Threshold
3328                   EdgeDetect
3329                   Spread
3330                   Shade
3331                   Raise
3332                   Segment
3333                   Solarize
3334                   Swirl
3335                   Implode
3336                   Wave
3337                   OilPaint
3338                   CharcoalDrawing
3339                   JPEG
3340
3341              The default preview is JPEG.
3342
3343       -process <command>
3344              process a sequence of images using a process module
3345
3346              The command argument has the form module=arg1,arg2,arg3,...,argN
3347              where module is the name of the module  to  invoke  (e.g.  "Ana‐
3348              lyze")  and  arg1,arg2,arg3,...,argN  are an arbitrary number of
3349              arguments to pass to the process module.  The sequence of images
3350              is terminated by the appearance of any option.
3351
3352              If  the  -process  option appears after all of the input images,
3353              all images are processed.
3354
3355              For example:
3356
3357                   gm convert logo: -process Analyze= \
3358                     -format "%[BrightnessMean],%[BrightnessStddev]" info:-
3359                   51952,23294
3360
3361
3362       -profile <filename>
3363              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
3364
3365              -profile filename adds an ICM (ICC color management), IPTC
3366              (newswire information), or a generic (including Exif) profile to the image
3367
3368              Use +profile icm, +profile iptc, or
3369              +profile profile_name to remove the respective profile.
3370              Multiple profiles may be listed, separated by commas. Profiles may be
3371              excluded from subsequent listed matches by preceding their name with
3372              an exclamation point.  For example, +profile '!icm,*' strips
3373              all profiles except for the ICM profile.  Use identify
3374              -verbose to find out what profiles are in the image file.  Use
3375              +profile "*" to remove all profiles.
3376              Writing the image to a format that does not support profiles will
3377              of course also cause all profiles to be removed.  The JPEG and PNG
3378              formats will store any profiles that have been read and not removed.
3379              In JPEG they are stored in APP1 markers, and in PNG they are stored
3380              as hex-coded binary in compressed zTXt chunks, except for the iCC
3381              chunk which is stored in the iCCP chunk.
3382
3383              To extract a profile, the -profile option is not used.  Instead,
3384              simply write the file to an image
3385              format such as APP1, 8BIM, ICM, or IPTC.
3386
3387              For example, to extract the Exif data (which is stored in JPEG files
3388              in the APP1 profile), use
3389
3390
3391                  gm convert cockatoo.jpg exifdata.app1
3392              Note that GraphicsMagick does not attempt to update any  profile
3393              to  reflect  changes made to the image, e.g., rotation from por‐
3394              trait to landscape orientation, so it is possible that the  pre‐
3395              served profile may contain invalid data.
3396
3397       -preserve-timestamp
3398              preserve the original timestamps of the file
3399
3400              Use this option to preserve the original modification and access
3401              timestamps of the file, even if it has been modified.
3402
3403       +progress
3404              disable progress monitor and busy cursor
3405
3406              By default, when an image is displayed, a progress  monitor  bar
3407              is  shown  in  the  top left corner of an existing image display
3408              window, and the current cursor is  replaced  with  an  hourglass
3409              cursor.  Use  +progress to disable the progress monitor and busy
3410              cursor during display operations.  While the progress monitor is
3411              disabled for all operations, the busy cursor continues to be en‐
3412              abled for non-display operations such as image processing.  This
3413              option is useful for non-interactive display operations, or when
3414              a "clean" look is desired.
3415
3416       -quality <value>
3417              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
3418               For the JPEG and MPEG image formats, quality is 0 (lowest image
3419              quality  and highest compression) to 100 (best quality but least
3420              effective compression). The default  quality  is  75.   Use  the
3421              -sampling-factor  option to specify the factors for chroma down‐
3422              sampling.  To use the same quality value as that  found  by  the
3423              JPEG decoder, use the -define jpeg:preserve-settings flag.
3424
3425              For  the  MIFF image format, and the TIFF format while using ZIP
3426              compression, quality/10 is the zlib compression level, which  is
3427              0  (worst  but  fastest compression) to 9 (best but slowest). It
3428              has no effect on the image appearance, since the compression  is
3429              always lossless.
3430
3431              For  the  JPEG-2000 image format, quality is mapped using a non-
3432              linear equation to the compression ratio required by the  Jasper
3433              library. This non-linear equation is intended to loosely approx‐
3434              imate the quality provided by the JPEG v1  format.  The  default
3435              quality  value 75 results in a request for 16:1 compression. The
3436              quality value 100 results in a request  for  non-lossy  compres‐
3437              sion.
3438
3439              For  the  MNG  and PNG image formats, the quality value sets the
3440              zlib compression level (quality / 10) and filter-type (quality %
3441              10).  Compression  levels  range from 0 (fastest compression) to
3442              100 (best but slowest). For compression level  0,  the  Huffman-
3443              only  strategy is used, which is fastest but not necessarily the
3444              worst compression.
3445
3446              If filter-type is 4 or less, the specified filter-type  is  used
3447              for all scanlines:
3448
3449                   0: none
3450                   1: sub
3451                   2: up
3452                   3: average
3453                   4: Paeth
3454
3455              If  filter-type is 5, adaptive filtering is used when quality is
3456              greater than 50 and the image does not have a color map,  other‐
3457              wise no filtering is used.
3458
3459              If  filter-type is 6, adaptive filtering with minimum-sum-of-ab‐
3460              solute-values is used.
3461
3462              Only if the output is MNG, if filter-type is 7, the  LOCO  color
3463              transformation  and adaptive filtering with minimum-sum-of-abso‐
3464              lute-values are used.
3465
3466              The default is quality is 75, which means nearly the  best  com‐
3467              pression  with  adaptive  filtering.  The quality setting has no
3468              effect on the appearance of PNG and MNG images, since  the  com‐
3469              pression is always lossless.
3470
3471              For further information, see the PNG specification.
3472
3473              When  writing  a JNG image with transparency, two quality values
3474              are required, one for the main image and one for  the  grayscale
3475              image  that conveys the opacity channel.  These are written as a
3476              single integer equal to the main image quality plus  1000  times
3477              the opacity quality.  For example, if you want to use quality 75
3478              for the main image and quality 90 to compress the opacity  data,
3479              use -quality 90075.
3480
3481              For  the  PNM  family  of  formats (PNM, PGM, and PPM) specify a
3482              quality factor of zero in order to obtain the ASCII  variant  of
3483              the  format. Note that -compress none used to be used to trigger
3484              ASCII output but provided the opposite result of  what  was  ex‐
3485              pected as compared with other formats.
3486
3487              For  the  TIFF format, the JPEG, WebP, Zip, and Zstd compression
3488              algorithms are influenced by the quality value.  JPEG  and  WebP
3489              provide  lossy  compression  so higher quality produces a larger
3490              file with less degradation.  The Zip and Zstd compression  algo‐
3491              rithms  (and  WebP  in lossless mode) are lossless and for these
3492              algorithms a higher ´quality' means to work harder to produce  a
3493              smaller file, but with no difference in image quality.
3494
3495       -raise <width>x<height>
3496              lighten or darken image edges
3497
3498              This will create a 3-D effect. See -geometry for details details
3499              about the geometry specification. Offsets are not used.
3500
3501              Use -raise to create a raised effect, otherwise use +raise.
3502
3503       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
3504              random threshold the image
3505
3506              The channel or channels specified in the <channeltype>  argument
3507              are  reduced  to  binary,  using an random-threshold method. The
3508              choices for channeltype are All, Intensity,  Red,  Green,  Blue,
3509              Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black, and Opacity
3510
3511              When  channeltype  is  "All",  the color samples are thresholded
3512              into a graylevel and then that gray level is stored in the three
3513              color  channels.  Separately, the opacity channel is thresholded
3514              into a bilevel opacity value which  is  stored  in  the  opacity
3515              channel.  For  each pixel, a new random number is used to estab‐
3516              lish the threshold to be used. The threshold never  exceeds  the
3517              specified  maximum  (HIGH)  and is never less than the specified
3518              minimum (LOW).
3519
3520              When channeltype is "intensity",  only  the  color  samples  are
3521              thresholded.  When channeltype is "opacity" or "matte", only the
3522              opacity channel is thresholded. The other  named  channels  only
3523              threshold the associated channel.
3524
3525       -recolor <matrix>
3526              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
3527
3528              A  user  supplied  color translation matrix (expressed as a text
3529              string) is used to translate/blend the image channels  based  on
3530              weightings  in  a supplied matrix which may be of order 3 (color
3531              channels only), 4 (color channels plus  opacity),  or  5  (color
3532              channels plus opacity and offset).  Values in the columns of the
3533              matrix (red, green, blue, opacity) are used as multipliers  with
3534              the  existing channel values and added together according to the
3535              rows of the matrix.  Matrix values are floating point and may be
3536              negative.   The  offset column (column 5) is purely additive and
3537              is scaled such that 0.0 to 1.0 represents  the  maximum  quantum
3538              range  (but  values are not limited to this range). The math for
3539              the color translation matrix is similar to that  used  by  Adobe
3540              Flash except that the offset is scaled to 1.0 (divide Flash off‐
3541              set by 255 for use with GraphicsMagick) so that the results  are
3542              independent of quantum depth.
3543
3544              An identity matrix exists for each matrix order which results in
3545              no change to the image.  The translation matrix should be  based
3546              on an alteration of the identity matrix.
3547
3548              Identity matrix of order 3
3549
3550                1 0 0
3551                0 1 0
3552                0 0 1
3553
3554              which may be formatted into a convenient matrix argument similar
3555              to (comma is treated as white space):
3556
3557                -recolor "1 0 0, 0 1 0, 0 0 1"
3558
3559              Identity matrix of order 4
3560
3561                1 0 0 0
3562                0 1 0 0
3563                0 0 1 0
3564                0 0 0 1
3565
3566              Identity matrix of order 5.  The last row is required  to  exist
3567              for the purpose of parsing, but is otherwise not used.
3568
3569                1 0 0 0 0
3570                0 1 0 0 0
3571                0 0 1 0 0
3572                0 0 0 1 0
3573                0 0 0 0 1
3574
3575              As an example, an image wrongly in BGR channel order may be con‐
3576              verted to RGB using this matrix (blue->red, red->blue):
3577
3578                0 0 1
3579                0 1 0
3580                1 0 0
3581
3582              and an RGB image using standard Rec.709 primaries  may  be  con‐
3583              verted to grayscale using this matrix of standard weighting fac‐
3584              tors:
3585
3586                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3587                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3588                0.2126 0.7152 0.0722
3589
3590              and contrast may be reduced by scaling down by 80% and adding  a
3591              10% offset:
3592
3593                0.8 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1
3594                0.0 0.8 0.0 0.0 0.1
3595                0.0 0.0 0.8 0.0 0.1
3596                0.0 0.0 0.0 0.8 0.1
3597                0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.0
3598
3599       -red-primary <x>,<y>
3600              red chromaticity primary point
3601
3602       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
3603              apply options to a portion of the image
3604
3605              The x and y offsets are treated in the same manner as in -crop.
3606
3607       -remote
3608              perform a X11 remote operation
3609
3610              The -remote command sends a command to a "gm display" or "gm an‐
3611              imate" which is already running. The only command recognized  at
3612              this  time is the name of an image file to load. This capability
3613              is very useful to load new images  without  needing  to  restart
3614              GraphicsMagick  (e.g.  for a slide-show or to use GraphicsMagick
3615              as the display  engine  for  a  different  GUI).  Also  see  the
3616              +progress  option for a way to disable progress indication for a
3617              clean look while loading new images.
3618
3619       -render
3620              render vector operations
3621
3622              Use +render to turn off rendering  vector  operations.  This  is
3623              useful  when  saving the result to vector formats such as MVG or
3624              SVG.
3625
3626       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
3627              Adjust image page offsets
3628
3629              Adjust the current image page canvas and  position  based  on  a
3630              relative  page specification.  This option may be used to change
3631              the location of a subframe (e.g. part of an animation) prior  to
3632              composition.   If  the  geometry  specification is absolute (in‐
3633              cludes a '!'), then the offset adjustment is absolute and  there
3634              is  no  adjustment  to page width and height, otherwise the page
3635              width and height values are also adjusted based on  the  current
3636              image  dimensions.  Use +repage to set the image page offsets to
3637              default.
3638
3639       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
3640              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
3641
3642              Resize the image so that its rendered size remains the  same  as
3643              the original at the specified target resolution. Either the cur‐
3644              rent image resolution units or the previously  set  with  -units
3645              are  used  to  interpret the argument. For example, if a 300 DPI
3646              image renders at 3 inches by 2 inches on a 300 DPI device,  when
3647              the  image  has  been  resampled  to 72 DPI, it will render at 3
3648              inches by 2 inches on a 72 DPI device.  Note that only  a  small
3649              number  of  image formats (e.g. JPEG, PNG, and TIFF) are capable
3650              of storing the image resolution. For formats which do  not  sup‐
3651              port  an  image resolution, the original resolution of the image
3652              must be specified via -density on  the  command  line  prior  to
3653              specifying the resample resolution.
3654
3655              Note  that  Photoshop stores and obtains image resolution from a
3656              proprietary embedded profile. If this profile exists in the  im‐
3657              age,  then  Photoshop will continue to treat the image using its
3658              former resolution, ignoring the image  resolution  specified  in
3659              the standard file header.
3660
3661              Some  image  formats (e.g. PNG) require use of metric or english
3662              units so even if the original image used a particular unit  sys‐
3663              tem,  if  it is saved to a different format prior to resampling,
3664              then it may be necessary to specify the desired resolution units
3665              using  -units  since  the  original units may have been lost. In
3666              other words, do not assume that the  resolution  units  are  re‐
3667              stored if the image has been saved to a file.
3668
3669       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
3670              resize an image
3671
3672              This  is an alias for the -geometry option and it behaves in the
3673              same manner. If the -filter option precedes the -resize  option,
3674              the specified filter is used.
3675
3676              There are some exceptions:
3677
3678              When  used  as a composite option, -resize conveys the preferred
3679              size of the output image, while -geometry conveys the  size  and
3680              placement of the composite image within the main image.
3681
3682              When  used  as  a  montage option, -resize conveys the preferred
3683              size of the montage, while -geometry conveys  information  about
3684              the tiles.
3685
3686       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
3687              roll an image vertically or horizontally
3688
3689              See -geometry for details the geometry specification.  The x and
3690              y offsets are not affected by the -gravity option.
3691
3692              A negative x offset rolls the image left-to-right. A negative  y
3693              offset rolls the image top-to-bottom.
3694
3695       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
3696              rotate the image
3697
3698              Positive  angles rotate the image in a clockwise direction while
3699              negative angles rotate counter-clockwise.
3700
3701              Use > to rotate the image only if its width exceeds the  height.
3702              <  rotates  the image only if its width is less than the height.
3703              For example, if you specify -rotate "-90>" and the image size is
3704              480x640,  the  image  is  not rotated.  However, if the image is
3705              640x480, it is rotated by -90 degrees.  If you use > or  <,  en‐
3706              close  it  in quotation marks to prevent it from being misinter‐
3707              preted as a file redirection.
3708
3709              Empty triangles left over from rotating  the  image  are  filled
3710              with  the  color  defined as background (class backgroundColor).
3711              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
3712              -fill option.
3713
3714       -sample <geometry>
3715              scale image using pixel sampling
3716
3717              See  -geometry  for  details  about  the geometry specification.
3718              -sample ignores the -filter selection if the -filter  option  is
3719              present.   Offsets,  if  present in the geometry string, are ig‐
3720              nored, and the -gravity option has no effect.
3721
3722       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
3723              chroma subsampling factors
3724
3725              This option specifies the sampling factors to  be  used  by  the
3726              DPX,  JPEG,  MPEG,  or YUV encoders for chroma downsampling. The
3727              sampling factor must be specified while reading the raw YUV for‐
3728              mat  since  it  is  not preserved in the file header.  Industry-
3729              standard video subsampling notation such as "4:2:2" may also  be
3730              used to specify the sampling factors. "4:2:2" is equivalent to a
3731              specification of "2x1"
3732
3733              The JPEG decoder obtains  the  original  sampling  factors  (and
3734              quality settings) when a JPEG file is read. To re-use the origi‐
3735              nal sampling factors (and quality setting) when JPEG is  output,
3736              use the -define jpeg:preserve-settings flag.
3737
3738       -scale <geometry>
3739              scale the image.
3740
3741              See  -geometry  for  details  about  the geometry specification.
3742              -scale uses a simpler, faster  algorithm,  and  it  ignores  the
3743              -filter selection if the -filter option is present.  Offsets, if
3744              present in the geometry string, are ignored,  and  the  -gravity
3745              option has no effect.
3746
3747       -scene <value>
3748              set scene number
3749
3750              This option sets the scene number of an image or the first image
3751              in an image sequence.
3752
3753       -scenes <value-value>
3754              range of image scene numbers to read
3755
3756              Each image in the range is read with the filename followed by  a
3757              period  (.)  and  the decimal scene number.  You can change this
3758              behavior by embedding a %d, %0Nd, %o, %0No, %x, or  %0Nx  printf
3759              format specification in the file name. For example,
3760
3761                  gm montage -scenes 5-7 image.miff montage.miff
3762
3763              makes  a  montage  of  files image.miff.5, image.miff.6, and im‐
3764              age.miff.7, and
3765
3766                  gm animate -scenes 0-12 image%02d.miff
3767
3768              animates files image00.miff, image01.miff, through image12.miff.
3769
3770       -screen
3771              specify the screen to capture
3772
3773              This option indicates that the GetImage request used  to  obtain
3774              the  image  should  be  done on the root window, rather than di‐
3775              rectly on the specified window.  In this  way,  you  can  obtain
3776              pieces  of  other windows that overlap the specified window, and
3777              more importantly, you can capture menus or other popups that are
3778              independent windows but appear over the specified window.
3779
3780       -set <attribute> <value>
3781              set an image attribute
3782
3783              Set  a  named image attribute.  The attribute is set on the cur‐
3784              rent (previously specified on command line) image.
3785
3786       +set <attribute>
3787              unset an image attribute
3788
3789              Unset a named image attribute.  The attribute  is  removed  from
3790              the current (previously specified on command line) image.
3791
3792       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
3793              segment an image
3794
3795              Segment an image by analyzing the histograms of the color compo‐
3796              nents and identifying units that are homogeneous with the  fuzzy
3797              c-means technique.
3798
3799              Segmentation  is  a  very  useful fast and and approximate color
3800              quantization algorithm for scanned printed pages or scanned car‐
3801              toons.  It may also be used as a special effect. Specify cluster
3802              threshold as the minimum percentage of total pixels in a cluster
3803              before it is considered valid.  For huge images containing small
3804              detail, this may need to be a tiny fraction of a  percent  (e.g.
3805              0.015)  so that important detail is not lost.  Smoothing thresh‐
3806              old eliminates noise in the second derivative of the  histogram.
3807              As  the value is increased, you can expect a smoother second de‐
3808              rivative. The default is 1.5. Add the -verbose option to  see  a
3809              dump  of  cluster statistics given the parameters used. The sta‐
3810              tistics may be used as a guide to help fine tune the options.
3811
3812       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
3813              shade the image using a distant light source
3814
3815              Specify azimuth and elevation  as  the  position  of  the  light
3816              source.  Use +shade to return the shading results as a grayscale
3817              image.
3818
3819       -shadow <radius>{x<sigma>}
3820              shadow the montage
3821
3822       -shared-memory
3823              use shared memory
3824
3825              This option specifies whether the utility should attempt to  use
3826              shared memory for pixmaps.  GraphicsMagick must be compiled with
3827              shared memory support, and the display must support the  MIT-SHM
3828              extension.   Otherwise,  this option is ignored.  The default is
3829              True.
3830
3831       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
3832              sharpen the image
3833
3834              Use a Gaussian operator of the given radius and standard  devia‐
3835              tion (sigma).
3836
3837       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
3838              shave pixels from the image edges
3839
3840              Specify the width of the region to be removed from both sides of
3841              the image and the height of the regions to be removed  from  top
3842              and bottom.
3843
3844       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
3845              shear the image along the X or Y axis
3846
3847              Use the specified positive or negative shear angle.
3848
3849              Shearing slides one edge of an image along the X or Y axis, cre‐
3850              ating a parallelogram. An X direction shear slides an edge along
3851              the X axis, while a Y direction shear slides an edge along the Y
3852              axis. The amount of the shear is controlled by  a  shear  angle.
3853              For  X direction shears, x degrees is measured relative to the Y
3854              axis, and similarly, for Y direction shears y  degrees  is  mea‐
3855              sured relative to the X axis.
3856
3857              Empty  triangles  left  over  from shearing the image are filled
3858              with the color defined as  background  (class  backgroundColor).
3859              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
3860              -fill option.
3861
3862       -silent
3863              operate silently
3864
3865       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
3866              width and height of the image
3867
3868              Use this option to specify the width and height  of  raw  images
3869              whose  dimensions are unknown such as GRAY, RGB, or CMYK. In ad‐
3870              dition to width and height, use -size with an offset to skip any
3871              header  information in the image or tell the number of colors in
3872              a MAP image file, (e.g. -size 640x512+256).
3873
3874              For Photo CD images, choose from these sizes:
3875
3876                   192x128
3877                   384x256
3878                   768x512
3879                   1536x1024
3880                   3072x2048
3881
3882              Finally, use this option to choose a particular resolution layer
3883              of a JBIG or JPEG image (e.g. -size 1024x768).
3884
3885       -snaps <value>
3886              number of screen snapshots
3887
3888              Use  this  option  to grab more than one image from the X server
3889              screen, to create an animation sequence.
3890
3891       -solarize <factor>
3892              negate all pixels above the threshold level
3893
3894              Specify factor as the percent threshold of the  intensity  (0  -
3895              99.9%).
3896
3897              This  option produces a solarization effect seen when exposing a
3898              photographic film to light during the development process.
3899
3900       -spread <amount>
3901              displace image pixels by a random amount
3902
3903              Amount defines the size of the neighborhood around each pixel to
3904              choose a candidate pixel to swap.
3905
3906       -stegano <offset>
3907              hide watermark within an image
3908
3909              Use  an  offset  to start the image hiding some number of pixels
3910              from the beginning of the image.  Note this offset and the image
3911              size.   You  will  need this information to recover the stegano‐
3912              graphic image (e.g. display -size 320x256+35 stegano:image.png).
3913
3914       -stereo
3915              composite two images to create a stereo anaglyph
3916
3917              The left side of the stereo pair is saved as the red channel  of
3918              the output image.  The right side is saved as the green channel.
3919              Red-green stereo glasses  are  required  to  properly  view  the
3920              stereo image.
3921
3922       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
3923
3924              All  embedded profiles and text attributes are stripped from the
3925              image.  This is useful for images used for the web, or when out‐
3926              put files need to be as small as possible
3927
3928              Be  careful  not to use this option to remove author, copyright,
3929              and license information that you are required to retain when re‐
3930              distributing an image.
3931
3932       -stroke <color>
3933              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
3934
3935              The  color  is  specified  using  the format described under the
3936              -fill option.
3937
3938              See -draw for further details.
3939
3940       -strokewidth <value>
3941              set the stroke width
3942
3943              See -draw for further details.
3944
3945       -swirl <degrees>
3946              swirl image pixels about the center
3947
3948              Degrees defines the tightness of the swirl.
3949
3950       -text-font <name>
3951              font for writing fixed-width text
3952
3953              Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in fixed  (type‐
3954              writer style) formatted text.  The default is 14 point Courier.
3955
3956              You  can tag a font to specify whether it is a PostScript, True‐
3957              Type, or X11 font.  For example, Courier.ttf is a TrueType  font
3958              and x:fixed is X11.
3959
3960       -texture <filename>
3961              name of texture to tile onto the image background
3962
3963       -threshold <value>{%}
3964              threshold the image
3965
3966              Modify  the  image  such that any pixel sample with an intensity
3967              value greater than the threshold is assigned the maximum  inten‐
3968              sity  (white),  or  otherwise  is assigned the minimum intensity
3969              (black). If a percent prefix is applied, then the threshold is a
3970              percentage of the available range.
3971
3972              To  efficiently  create a black and white image from a color im‐
3973              age, use
3974
3975                  gm convert -threshold 50% in.png out.png
3976
3977              The optimum threshold value depends on the nature of the  image.
3978              In  order  to  threshold  individual channels, use the -operator
3979              subcommand with it's Threshold, Threshold-White,  or  Threshold-
3980              Black options.
3981
3982       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
3983              resize an image (quickly)
3984
3985              The -thumbnail command resizes the image as quickly as possible,
3986              with more concern for speed than resulting image  quality.   Re‐
3987              gardless,  resulting image quality should be acceptable for many
3988              uses.  It is primarily intended to be used to  generate  smaller
3989              versions  of  the image, but may also be used to enlarge the im‐
3990              age.  The -thumbnail geometry argument observes the same  syntax
3991              and rules as it does for -resize.
3992
3993       -tile <filename>
3994              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
3995
3996       -tile <geometry>
3997              layout of images [montage]
3998
3999       -title <string>
4000              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
4001
4002              Use this option to assign a specific title to the image. This is
4003              assigned to the image window and is typically displayed  in  the
4004              window  title  bar.   Optionally you can include the image file‐
4005              name, type, width, height, Exif data, or other  image  attribute
4006              by embedding special format characters described under the -for‐
4007              mat option.
4008
4009              For example,
4010
4011                   -title "%m:%f %wx%h"
4012
4013              produces an image title of MIFF:bird.miff 512x480 for  an  image
4014              titled bird.miff and whose width is 512 and height is 480.
4015
4016       -transform
4017              transform the image
4018
4019              This  option  applies  the transformation matrix from a previous
4020              -affine option.
4021
4022                  gm convert -affine 2,2,-2,2,0,0 -transform bird.ppm bird.jpg
4023
4024       -transparent <color>
4025              make this color transparent within the image
4026
4027              The color is specified using  the  format  described  under  the
4028              -fill option.
4029
4030       -treedepth <value>
4031              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
4032
4033              Normally,  this integer value is zero or one. A value of zero or
4034              one causes the use of an optimal tree depth for the color reduc‐
4035              tion algorithm
4036
4037              An optimal depth generally allows the best representation of the
4038              source image with the fastest computational speed and the  least
4039              amount  of  memory.  However, the default depth is inappropriate
4040              for some images. To assure the best representation,  try  values
4041              between  2 and 8 for this parameter.  Refer to quantize for more
4042              details.
4043
4044              The -colors or -monochrome option, or writing to an image format
4045              which  requires  color reduction, is required for this option to
4046              take effect.
4047
4048       -trim  trim an image
4049
4050              This option removes any edges that are exactly the same color as
4051              the  corner  pixels.   Use -fuzz to make -trim remove edges that
4052              are nearly the same color as the corner pixels.
4053
4054       -type <type>
4055              the image type
4056
4057              Choose from: Bilevel, Grayscale,  Palette,  PaletteMatte,  True‐
4058              Color, TrueColorMatte, ColorSeparation, ColorSeparationMatte, or
4059              Optimize.
4060
4061              Normally, when a format supports different  subformats  such  as
4062              bilevel, grayscale, palette, truecolor, and truecolor+alpha, the
4063              encoder will try to choose a suitable subformat based on the na‐
4064              ture  of  the  image. The -type option may be used to tailor the
4065              output subformat. By default the output subformat  is  based  on
4066              readily  available  image  information and is usually similar to
4067              the input format.
4068
4069              Specify -type Optimize in order to enable inspecting all  pixels
4070              (if  necessary)  in  order to find the most efficient subformat.
4071              Inspecting all of the pixels may be slow for very large  images,
4072              particularly if they are stored in a disk cache. If an RGB image
4073              contains only gray pixels, then every pixel in the image must be
4074              inspected  in  order  to  decide  that  the  image  is  actually
4075              grayscale!
4076
4077              Sometimes a specific subformat is desired. For example, to force
4078              a  JPEG  image to be written in TrueColor RGB format even though
4079              only gray pixels are present, use
4080
4081                  gm convert bird.pgm -type TrueColor bird.jpg
4082
4083              Similarly, using -type TrueColorMatte will force the encoder  to
4084              write  an  alpha channel even though the image is opaque, if the
4085              output format supports transparency.
4086
4087              Some pseudo-formats (e.g. the XC format) will  respect  the  re‐
4088              quested  type  if it occurs previously on the command line.  For
4089              example, to obtain a DirectClass solid color canvas image rather
4090              than PsuedoClass, use
4091
4092                  gm convert -size 640x480 -type TrueColor xc:red red.miff
4093
4094              Likewise,  specify -type Bilevel, Grayscale, TrueColor, or True‐
4095              ColorMatte prior to reading a Postscript (or PDF file) in  order
4096              to  influence the type of image that Ghostcript returns. Reading
4097              performance will be dramatically improved for black/white  Post‐
4098              script  if Bilevel is specified, and will be considerably faster
4099              if Grayscale is specified.
4100
4101       -update <seconds>
4102               detect when image file is modified and redisplay.
4103
4104              Suppose that while you are displaying an image the file that  is
4105              currently displayed is over-written.  display will automatically
4106              detect that the input file has been changed and update the  dis‐
4107              played image accordingly.
4108
4109       -units <type>
4110              the units of image resolution
4111
4112              Choose  from:  Undefined, PixelsPerInch, or PixelsPerCentimeter.
4113              This option is normally used in conjunction  with  the  -density
4114              option.
4115
4116       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
4117              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
4118
4119              The  -unsharp  option  sharpens an image. The image is convolved
4120              with a Gaussian operator of the given radius and standard devia‐
4121              tion  (sigma).  For  reasonable results, radius should be larger
4122              than sigma. Use a radius of 0 to have the method select a  suit‐
4123              able radius.
4124
4125              The parameters are:
4126
4127
4128               radius
4129
4130
4131                    The  radius  of  the Gaussian, in pixels, not counting the
4132                    center pixel (default 0).
4133
4134               sigma
4135
4136
4137                    The standard deviation of the Gaussian, in pixels (default
4138                    1.0).
4139
4140               amount
4141
4142
4143                    The  percentage of the difference between the original and
4144                    the blur image that is added back into the  original  (de‐
4145                    fault 1.0).
4146
4147               threshold
4148
4149
4150                    The  threshold,  as  a fraction of MaxRGB, needed to apply
4151                    the difference amount (default 0.05).
4152
4153
4154
4155
4156       -use-pixmap
4157              use the pixmap
4158
4159       -verbose
4160              print detailed information about the image
4161
4162              This information is printed: image scene number; image name; im‐
4163              age  size; the image class (DirectClass or PseudoClass); the to‐
4164              tal number of unique colors; and the number of seconds  to  read
4165              and  transform the image. If the image is DirectClass, the total
4166              number of unique colors is  not  displayed  unless  -verbose  is
4167              specified  twice since it may take quite a long time to compute,
4168              particularly for deep images.  If the image is PseudoClass  then
4169              its  pixels are defined by indexes into a colormap. If the image
4170              is DirectClass then each pixel includes a complete and  indepen‐
4171              dent color specification.
4172
4173              If -colors is also specified, the total unique colors in the im‐
4174              age and color reduction error values are printed. Refer to quan‐
4175              tize for a description of these values.
4176
4177       -version
4178              print GraphicsMagick version string
4179
4180       -view <string>
4181              FlashPix viewing parameters
4182
4183       -virtual-pixel <method>
4184              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
4185
4186              This  option defines "virtual pixels" for use in operations that
4187              can access pixels outside the boundaries of an image.
4188
4189              Choose from these methods:
4190
4191
4192               Constant
4193
4194
4195                    Use the image background color.
4196
4197               Edge
4198
4199
4200                    Extend the edge pixel toward infinity (default).
4201
4202               Mirror
4203
4204
4205                    Mirror the image.
4206
4207               Tile
4208
4209
4210                    Tile the image.
4211
4212
4213
4214
4215               This option affects operations that use virtual pixels such  as
4216               -blur, -sharpen, -wave, etc.
4217
4218       -visual <type>
4219              animate images using this X visual type
4220
4221              Choose from these visual classes:
4222
4223                   StaticGray
4224                   GrayScale
4225                   StaticColor
4226                   PseudoColor
4227                   TrueColor
4228                   DirectColor
4229                   default
4230                   visual id
4231
4232              The  X  server  must support the visual you choose, otherwise an
4233              error occurs.  If a visual is not specified,  the  visual  class
4234              that  can  display  the  most simultaneous colors on the default
4235              screen is chosen.
4236
4237       -watermark <brightness>x<saturation>
4238              percent brightness and saturation of a watermark
4239
4240       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
4241              alter an image along a sine wave
4242
4243              Specify amplitude and wavelength of the wave.
4244
4245       -white-point <x>,<y>
4246              chromaticity white point
4247
4248       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
4249              pixels above the threshold become white
4250
4251              Use -white-threshold to set pixels with values above the  speci‐
4252              fied  threshold  to  maximum value (white). If only one value is
4253              supplied, or the red, green, and blue values are identical, then
4254              intensity  thresholding  is  used. If the color threshold values
4255              are not identical then channel-based thresholding is  used,  and
4256              color  distortion will occur. Specify a negative value (e.g. -1)
4257              if you want a channel to be ignored but you do want to threshold
4258              a  channel  later  in  the  list. If a percent (%) symbol is ap‐
4259              pended, then the values are treated as a percentage  of  maximum
4260              range.
4261
4262       -window <id>
4263              make image the background of a window
4264
4265              id  can be a window id or name.  Specify root to select X's root
4266              window as the target window.
4267
4268              By default the image is tiled onto the background of the  target
4269              window.    If  backdrop or -geometry are specified, the image is
4270              surrounded by the background color.  Refer to  X  RESOURCES  for
4271              details.
4272
4273              The  image  will not display on the root window if the image has
4274              more unique colors than the target window colormap allows.   Use
4275              -colors to reduce the number of colors.
4276
4277       -window-group
4278              specify the window group
4279
4280       -write <filename>
4281              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
4282
4283              The  current image is written to the specified filename and then
4284              processing continues using that image. The following is an exam‐
4285              ple  of  how  several  sizes of an image may be generated in one
4286              command (repeat as often as needed):
4287
4288                  gm convert input.jpg -resize 50% -write input50.jpg \
4289                            -resize 25% input25.jpg
4290
4291       -write <filename>
4292              write the image to a file [display]
4293
4294              If filename already exists, you will be prompted as  to  whether
4295              it should be overwritten.
4296
4297              By  default, the image is written in the format that it was read
4298              in as.  To specify a particular image  format,  prefix  filename
4299              with  the image type and a colon (e.g., ps:image) or specify the
4300              image type as the filename suffix (e.g., image.ps). Specify file
4301              as  -  for standard output. If file has the extension .Z or .gz,
4302              the file size is compressed using compress or gzip respectively.
4303              Precede the image file name with | to pipe to a system command.
4304
4305              Use -compress to specify the type of image compression.
4306
4307              The  equivalent  X  resource  for  this  option is writeFilename
4308              (class WriteFilename).  See "X Resources", below, for details.
4309

ENVIRONMENT

4311       COLUMNS
4312              Output screen width. Used when formatting text for  the  screen.
4313              Many  Unix  systems  keep this shell variable up to date, but it
4314              may need to be explicitly exported in order  for  GraphicsMagick
4315              to see it.
4316
4317       DISPLAY
4318              X11  display  ID  (host,  display number, and screen in the form
4319              hostname:display.screen).
4320
4321       HOME   Location of user's home directory.  For  security  reasons,  now
4322              only observed by "uninstalled" builds of GraphicsMagick which do
4323              not have their location hard-coded or set by an installer.  When
4324              supported,  GraphicsMagick  searches  for configuration files in
4325              $HOME/.magick if the  directory  exists.  See  MAGICK_CODER_MOD‐
4326              ULE_PATH,  MAGICK_CONFIGURE_PATH,  and MAGICK_FILTER_MODULE_PATH
4327              if more flexibility is needed.
4328
4329       MAGICK_ACCESS_MONITOR
4330              When set to TRUE, command line monitor mode (enabled  by  -moni‐
4331              tor)  will  also show files accessed (including temporary files)
4332              and any external commands which are executed. This is useful for
4333              debugging,  but  also illustrates arguments made available to an
4334              access handler registered by the MagickSetConfirmAccessHandler()
4335              C library function.
4336
4337       MAGICK_CODER_STABILITY
4338              The  minimum  coder  stability level before it will be used. The
4339              available levels are PRIMARY, STABLE, UNSTABLE, and BROKEN.  The
4340              default  minimum  level is UNSTABLE, which means that all avail‐
4341              able working coders will be used. The purpose of this option  is
4342              to  reduce the security exposure (or apparent complexity) due to
4343              the huge number of formats  supported.  Coders  at  the  PRIMARY
4344              level are commonly used formats with very well maintained imple‐
4345              mentations. Coders at the STABLE level are reasonably well main‐
4346              tained  but  represent less used formats. Coders at the UNSTABLE
4347              level either have weak implementations, the file  format  itself
4348              is  weak, or the probability the coder will be needed is vanish‐
4349              ingly small. Coders at the BROKEN level are known to  often  not
4350              work  properly  or might not be useful in their current state at
4351              all.
4352
4353       MAGICK_CODER_MODULE_PATH
4354              Search path to use when searching for image  format  coder  mod‐
4355              ules.  This path allows the user to arbitrarily extend the image
4356              formats supported by GraphicsMagick by adding  loadable  modules
4357              to  an  arbitrary  location  rather  than  copying them into the
4358              GraphicsMagick installation directory.  The  formatting  of  the
4359              search  path  is  similar to operating system search paths (i.e.
4360              colon delimited for Unix, and semi-colon delimited for Microsoft
4361              Windows).  This user specified search path is used before trying
4362              the default search path.
4363
4364       MAGICK_CONFIGURE_PATH
4365              Search path to  use  when  searching  for  configuration  (.mgk)
4366              files.   The formatting of the search path is similar to operat‐
4367              ing system search paths (i.e.  colon  delimited  for  Unix,  and
4368              semi-colon delimited for Microsoft Windows). This user specified
4369              search path is used before trying the default search path.
4370
4371       MAGICK_DEBUG
4372              Debug options (see -debug for details).  Setting  the  configure
4373              debug option via an environment variable (e.g. MAGICK_DEBUG=con‐
4374              figure) is necessary to see the complete initialization process,
4375              which includes searching for configuration files.
4376
4377       MAGICK_FILTER_MODULE_PATH
4378              Search  path  to  use  when searching for filter process modules
4379              (invoked via -process). This path allows the user to arbitrarily
4380              extend GraphicsMagick's image processing functionality by adding
4381              loadable modules to an arbitrary location  rather  than  copying
4382              them into the GraphicsMagick installation directory. The format‐
4383              ting of the search path is similar to  operating  system  search
4384              paths  (i.e.  colon delimited for Unix, and semi-colon delimited
4385              for Microsoft Windows). This user specified search path is  used
4386              before trying the default search path.
4387
4388       MAGICK_GHOSTSCRIPT_PATH
4389              For  Microsoft  Windows, specify the path to the Ghostscript in‐
4390              stallation rather than searching for it  via  the  Windows  reg‐
4391              istry.   This helps in case Ghostscript is not installed via the
4392              Ghostscript Windows installer or the  user  wants  more  control
4393              over the Ghostscript used.
4394
4395       MAGICK_HOME
4396              Path  to  top of GraphicsMagick installation directory. Only ob‐
4397              served by "uninstalled" builds of GraphicsMagick  which  do  not
4398              have their location hard-coded or set by an installer.
4399
4400       MAGICK_MMAP_READ
4401              If  MAGICK_MMAP_READ is set to TRUE, GraphicsMagick will attempt
4402              to memory-map the input file for reading. This usually  substan‐
4403              tially  improves repeated read performance since the file is al‐
4404              ready in memory after the first time it has been read.  However,
4405              testing shows that performance may be reduced for files accessed
4406              for the first time since data is accessed via page-faults  (upon
4407              first  access)  and many operating systems fail to do sequential
4408              read-ahead of memory mapped files,  and  particularly  if  those
4409              files  are  accessed  over a network.  If many large input files
4410              are read, then enabling this  option  may  harm  performance  by
4411              overloading the operating system's VM system as it then needs to
4412              free unmapped pages and map new ones.
4413
4414       MAGICK_IO_FSYNC
4415              If MAGICK_IO_FSYNC is set to TRUE, then GraphicsMagick will  re‐
4416              quest  that the output file is fully flushed and synchronized to
4417              disk when it is closed. This incurs a performance  penalty,  but
4418              has  the  benefit that if the power fails or the system crashes,
4419              the file should be valid on disk. If image files are  referenced
4420              from  a  database,  then this option helps assure that the files
4421              referenced by the database are valid.
4422
4423       MAGICK_IOBUF_SIZE
4424              The amount of I/O buffering (in bytes) to use when  reading  and
4425              writing  encoded  files. The default is 16384, which is observed
4426              to work well for many cases. The best value for a local filesys‐
4427              tem  is usually the the native filesystem block size (e.g. 4096,
4428              8192, or even 131,072 for ZFS) in order to minimize  the  number
4429              of  physical  disk I/O operations.  I/O performance to files ac‐
4430              cessed over a network may benefit significantly by  tuning  this
4431              option.  Larger  values  are not necessarily better (they may be
4432              slower!), and there is rarely  any  benefit  from  using  values
4433              larger  than  32768.  Use  convert's -verbose option in order to
4434              evaluate read and write rates in pixels per second while keeping
4435              in  mind  that  the  operating system will try to cache files in
4436              RAM.
4437
4438       MAGICK_LIMIT_DISK
4439              Maximum amount of disk space allowed for use by the pixel cache.
4440
4441       MAGICK_LIMIT_FILES
4442              Maximum number of open files.
4443
4444       MAGICK_LIMIT_MAP
4445              Maximum size of a  memory  mapped  file  allocation.   A  memory
4446              mapped  file consumes memory when the file is accessed, although
4447              the system may reclaim such memory when needed.
4448
4449       MAGICK_LIMIT_MEMORY
4450              Maximum amount of memory to allocate from the heap.
4451
4452       MAGICK_LIMIT_PIXELS
4453              Maximum number of total pixels (image rows times  image  colums)
4454              to allow for any image which is requested to be created or read.
4455              This is useful to place a limit on how large an  image  may  be.
4456              If  the  input  image  file has image dimensions larger than the
4457              pixel limit, then the image memory allocation is denied  and  an
4458              error  is  returned  immediately.  This is a per-image limit and
4459              does not limit the total number of pixels due to multiple  image
4460              frames/pages (e.g. multi-page document or an animation).
4461
4462       MAGICK_LIMIT_READ
4463              Maximum number of uncompressed bytes which may be read while de‐
4464              coding an image.  Each read by the software from the input  file
4465              is  counted  against the total, even if it has been read before.
4466              Decoding fails when the limit is reached.  This limit helps  de‐
4467              fend  against  highly compressed files (e.g. via gzip), or files
4468              which use complex looping structures, or when data is being read
4469              from a stream (pipe).
4470
4471       MAGICK_LIMIT_WIDTH
4472              Maximum pixel width of an image read, or created.
4473
4474       MAGICK_LIMIT_HEIGHT
4475              Maximum pixel height of an image read, or created.
4476
4477       MAGICK_TMPDIR
4478              Path  to  directory  where GraphicsMagick should write temporary
4479              files. The default is to use the system default, or the location
4480              set by TMPDIR.
4481
4482       TMPDIR For  POSIX-compatible systems (Unix-compatible), the path to the
4483              directory where all applications should write  temporary  files.
4484              Overridden by MAGICK_TMPDIR if it is set.
4485
4486       TMP or TEMP
4487              For  Microsoft Windows, the path to the directory where applica‐
4488              tions should write temporary files. Overridden by  MAGICK_TMPDIR
4489              if it is set.
4490
4491       OMP_NUM_THREADS
4492              As per the OpenMP standard, this specifies the number of threads
4493              to use in parallel regions. Some compilers default the number of
4494              threads  to use to the number of processor cores available while
4495              others default to just one thread. See the OpenMP  specification
4496              for  other  standard  adjustments and your compiler's manual for
4497              vendor-specific settings.
4498

CONFIGURATION FILES

4500       GraphicsMagick uses a number of XML format configuration files:
4501
4502       colors.mgk
4503              colors configuration file
4504
4505                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4506                <colormap>
4507                  <color name="AliceBlue" red="240" green="248" blue="255"
4508                         compliance="SVG, X11, XPM" />
4509                </colormap>
4510
4511       delegates.mgk
4512              delegates configuration file
4513
4514       log.mgk
4515              logging configuration file
4516
4517                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4518                <magicklog>
4519                  <log events="None" />
4520                  <log output="stdout" />
4521                  <log filename="Magick-%d.log" />
4522                  <log generations="3" />
4523                  <log limit="2000" />
4524                  <log format="%t %r %u %p %m/%f/%l/%d:\n  %e"  />
4525                </magicklog>
4526
4527       modules.mgk
4528              loadable modules configuration file
4529
4530                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4531                <modulemap>
4532                  <module magick="8BIM" name="META" />
4533                </modulemap>
4534
4535       type.mgk
4536              master type (fonts) configuration file
4537
4538                <?xml version="1.0"?>
4539                <typemap>
4540                  <include file="type-windows.mgk" />
4541                  <type
4542                    name="AvantGarde-Book"
4543                    fullname="AvantGarde Book"
4544                    family="AvantGarde"
4545                    foundry="URW"
4546                    weight="400"
4547                    style="normal"
4548                    stretch="normal"
4549                    format="type1"
4550                    metrics="/usr/local/share/ghostscript/fonts/a010013l.afm"
4551                    glyphs="/usr/local/share/ghostscript/fonts/a010013l.pfb"
4552                  />
4553                </typemap>
4554

GM ANIMATE

4556       Animate displays a sequence of images on any workstation  display  run‐
4557       ning an X server. animate first determines the hardware capabilities of
4558       the workstation. If the number of unique colors in  an  image  is  less
4559       than  or  equal to the number the workstation can support, the image is
4560       displayed in an X window. Otherwise the number of colors in  the  image
4561       is  first  reduced to match the color resolution of the workstation be‐
4562       fore it is displayed.
4563
4564       This means that a continuous-tone 24 bits-per-pixel image  can  display
4565       on  a 8 bit pseudo-color device or monochrome device. In most instances
4566       the reduced color image closely resembles the original.  Alternatively,
4567       a  monochrome  or pseudo-color image sequence can display on a continu‐
4568       ous-tone 24 bits-per-pixel device.
4569
4570       To help prevent color flashing on X server visuals that have colormaps,
4571       animate  creates a single colormap from the image sequence. This can be
4572       rather time consuming. You can speed this operation up by reducing  the
4573       colors in the image before you "animate" them. Use mogrify to color re‐
4574       duce the images to a single colormap. See mogrify(1) for  details.  Al‐
4575       ternatively,  you  can use a Standard Colormap; or a static, direct, or
4576       true color visual.  You can define a Standard Colormap  with  xstdcmap.
4577       See xstdcmap(1) for details. This method is recommended for colormapped
4578       X server because it eliminates the need to compute a global colormap.
4579

EXAMPLES

4581       To animate a set of images of a cockatoo, use:
4582
4583           gm animate cockatoo.*
4584
4585       To animate a cockatoo image sequence while using the Standard  Colormap
4586       best, use:
4587
4588           xstdcmap -best
4589           gm animate -map best cockatoo.*
4590
4591       To  animate an image of a cockatoo without a border centered on a back‐
4592       drop, use:
4593
4594
4595           gm animate +borderwidth -backdrop cockatoo.*
4596

OPTIONS

4598       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
4599
4600
4601       -authenticate <string>
4602              decrypt image with this password
4603
4604       -backdrop
4605              display the image centered on a backdrop.
4606
4607       -background <color>
4608              the background color
4609
4610       -bordercolor <color>
4611              the border color
4612
4613       -borderwidth <geometry>
4614              the border width
4615
4616       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
4617              remove pixels from the interior of an image
4618
4619       -colormap <type>
4620              define the colormap type
4621
4622       -colors <value>
4623              preferred number of colors in the image
4624
4625       -colorspace <value>
4626              the type of colorspace
4627
4628       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
4629              preferred size and location of the cropped image
4630
4631       -debug <events>
4632              enable debug printout
4633
4634       -define <key>{=<value>},...
4635              add coder/decoder specific options
4636
4637       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
4638              display the next image after pausing
4639
4640       -density <width>x<height>
4641              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
4642
4643       -depth <value>
4644              depth of the image
4645
4646       -display <host:display[.screen]>
4647              specifies the X server to contact
4648
4649       -dispose <method>
4650              GIF disposal method
4651
4652       -dither
4653              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
4654
4655       -font <name>
4656              use this font when annotating the image with text
4657
4658       -foreground <color>
4659              define the foreground color
4660
4661       -gamma <value>
4662              level of gamma correction
4663
4664       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
4665              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
4666
4667       -help  print usage instructions
4668
4669       -iconGeometry <geometry>
4670              specify the icon geometry
4671
4672       -iconic
4673              iconic animation
4674
4675       -interlace <type>
4676              the type of interlacing scheme
4677
4678       -limit <type> <value>
4679              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
4680              resource limit
4681
4682       -log <string>
4683              Specify format for debug log
4684
4685       -map <type>
4686              display image using this type.
4687
4688       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
4689
4690       -mattecolor <color>
4691              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
4692
4693       -monitor
4694              show progress indication
4695
4696       -monochrome
4697              transform the image to black and white
4698
4699       -name  name an image
4700
4701       -noop  NOOP (no option)
4702
4703       -pause <seconds>
4704              pause between animation loops [animate]
4705
4706       -remote
4707              perform a X11 remote operation
4708
4709       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
4710              rotate the image
4711
4712       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
4713              chroma subsampling factors
4714
4715       -scenes <value-value>
4716              range of image scene numbers to read
4717
4718       -shared-memory
4719              use shared memory
4720
4721       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
4722              width and height of the image
4723
4724       -text-font <name>
4725              font for writing fixed-width text
4726
4727       -title <string>
4728              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
4729
4730       -treedepth <value>
4731              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
4732
4733       -trim  trim an image
4734
4735       -type <type>
4736              the image type
4737
4738       -verbose
4739              print detailed information about the image
4740
4741       -version
4742              print GraphicsMagick version string
4743
4744       -visual <type>
4745              animate images using this X visual type
4746
4747       -window <id>
4748              make image the background of a window
4749
4750              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
4751              above.
4752
4753
4754              Any option you specify on the command line remains in effect for
4755              the  group of images following it, until the group is terminated
4756              by the appearance of any option or -noop.  For example, to  ani‐
4757              mate  three images, the first with 32 colors, the second with an
4758              unlimited number of colors, and the third with only  16  colors,
4759              use:
4760
4761
4762                  gm animate -colors 32 cockatoo.1 -noop cockatoo.2
4763                           -colors 16 cockatoo.3
4764
4765              Animate  options can appear on the command line or in your X re‐
4766              sources file. See X(1). Options on the  command  line  supersede
4767              values  specified in your X resources file.  Image filenames may
4768              appear in any order on the command line if the image  format  is
4769              MIFF (refer to miff(5) and the scene keyword is specified in the
4770              image. Otherwise the images will display in the order  they  ap‐
4771              pear on the command line.
4772

MOUSE BUTTONS

4774       Press  any button to map or unmap the Command widget. See the next sec‐
4775       tion for more information about the Command widget.
4776

COMMAND WIDGET

4778       The Command widget lists a number of sub-menus and commands. They are
4779
4780           Animate
4781
4782               Open
4783               Play
4784               Step
4785               Repeat
4786               Auto Reverse
4787
4788           Speed
4789
4790               Faster
4791               Slower
4792
4793           Direction
4794
4795               Forward
4796               Reverse
4797
4798           Image Info
4799           Help
4800           Quit
4801
4802
4803       Menu items with a indented triangle have a sub-menu.  They  are  repre‐
4804       sented above as the indented items. To access a sub-menu item, move the
4805       pointer to the appropriate menu and press a button and drag.  When  you
4806       find  the  desired sub-menu item, release the button and the command is
4807       executed.  Move the pointer away from the sub-menu if you decide not to
4808       execute a particular command.
4809

KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS

4811               Ctl+O
4812
4813                    Press to load an image from a file.
4814               space
4815
4816                    Press to display the next image in the sequence.
4817               <
4818
4819                    Press  to  speed-up  the  display of the images.  Refer to
4820                    -delay for more information.
4821               >
4822
4823                    Press to slow the display of the images.  Refer to  -delay
4824                    for more information.
4825               ?
4826
4827                    Press  to  display information about the image.  Press any
4828                    key or button to erase the information.
4829                    This information is printed: image name;  image size;  and
4830                    the total number of unique colors in the image.
4831               F1
4832
4833                    Press to display helpful information about animate(1).
4834               Ctl-q
4835
4836                    Press to discard all images and exit program.
4837
4838

X RESOURCES

4840       Animate  options  can  appear on the command line or in your X resource
4841       file. Options on the command line supersede values specified in your  X
4842       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
4843
4844       All  animate  options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, the
4845       animate program uses the following X resources:
4846
4847               background (class Background)
4848
4849
4850                    Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image  window
4851                    background. The default is #ccc.
4852               borderColor (class BorderColor)
4853
4854
4855                    Specifies  the preferred color to use for the Image window
4856                    border. The default is #ccc.
4857               borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
4858
4859
4860                    Specifies the width in pixels of the Image window  border.
4861                    The default is 2.
4862               font (class Font or FontList)
4863
4864
4865                    Specifies  the name of the preferred font to use in normal
4866                    formatted text.  The default is 14 point Helvetica.
4867               foreground (class Foreground)
4868
4869
4870                    Specifies the preferred color to use for text  within  the
4871                    Image window.  The default is black.
4872               geometry (class geometry)
4873
4874
4875                    Specifies  the  preferred  size  and position of the image
4876                    window. It is not necessarily obeyed by  all  window  man‐
4877                    agers.  Offsets, if present, are handled in X(1) style.  A
4878                    negative x offset is measured from the right edge  of  the
4879                    screen  to  the  right  edge of the icon, and a negative y
4880                    offset is measured from the bottom edge of the  screen  to
4881                    the bottom edge of the icon.
4882               iconGeometry (class IconGeometry)
4883
4884
4885                    Specifies  the preferred size and position of the applica‐
4886                    tion when iconified.  It is not necessarily obeyed by  all
4887                    window  managers.  Offsets, if present, are handled in the
4888                    same manner as in class Geometry.
4889               iconic (class Iconic)
4890
4891
4892                    This resource indicates that you would prefer that the ap‐
4893                    plication's  windows  initially  not  be visible as if the
4894                    windows had be immediately iconified by you.  Window  man‐
4895                    agers may choose not to honor the application's request.
4896               matteColor (class MatteColor)
4897
4898
4899                    Specify  the  color  of  windows. It is used for the back‐
4900                    grounds of windows, menus, and notices.  A  3D  effect  is
4901                    achieved by using highlight and shadow colors derived from
4902                    this color. Default value: #ddd.
4903               name (class Name)
4904
4905
4906                    This resource specifies the name under which resources for
4907                    the  application  should be found. This resource is useful
4908                    in shell aliases to distinguish between invocations of  an
4909                    application,  without resorting to creating links to alter
4910                    the executable file name. The default is  the  application
4911                    name.
4912               sharedMemory (class SharedMemory)
4913
4914
4915                    This resource specifies whether animate should attempt use
4916                    shared memory for pixmaps. ImageMagick  must  be  compiled
4917                    with  shared  memory support, and the display must support
4918                    the MIT-SHM extension. Otherwise,  this  resource  is  ig‐
4919                    nored. The default is True.
4920               text_font (class textFont)
4921
4922
4923                    Specifies  the  name of the preferred font to use in fixed
4924                    (typewriter style) formatted text. The default is 14 point
4925                    Courier.
4926               title (class Title)
4927
4928
4929                    This resource specifies the title to be used for the Image
4930                    window. This information is sometimes  used  by  a  window
4931                    manager  to  provide  some  sort of header identifying the
4932                    window. The default is the image file name.
4933
4934

GM BATCH

DESCRIPTION

4937       batch executes an arbitary number of the utility  commands  (e.g.  con‐
4938       vert)  in  the form of a simple linear batch script in order to improve
4939       execution efficiency, and/or to allow use as a  subordinate  co-process
4940       under the control of an arbitrary script or program.
4941

EXAMPLES

4943        To  drive 'gm batch' using a shell script (or a program written in any
4944       language), have the script/program send commands to 'gm batch' via  its
4945       standard  input.   Specify  that standard input should be used by using
4946       '-' as the file name.  The following example converts all files  match‐
4947       ing  '*.jpg'  to TIFF format while rotating each file by 90 degrees and
4948       stripping all embedded profiles.  The shell script syntax  is  standard
4949       Unix shell:
4950
4951         for file in *.jpg
4952         do
4953           outfile=`basename $file .jpg`.tiff
4954           echo convert -verbose "'$file'" -rotate 90 \
4955           +profile "'*'" "'$outfile'"
4956         done | gm batch -echo on -feedback on -
4957
4958       We  can  accomplish the same as the previous example by putting all the
4959       commands in a text file and then specifying the name of the  text  file
4960       as the script to execute:
4961
4962         for file in *.jpg
4963         do
4964           outfile=`basename $file .jpg`.tiff
4965           echo convert -verbose "'$file'" -rotate 90 \
4966           +profile "'*'" "'$outfile'"
4967         done > script.txt
4968         gm batch -echo on -feedback on script.txt
4969

OPTIONS

4971       Options  are  processed  from  left to right and must appear before any
4972       filename argument.
4973
4974       -echo on|off
4975              command echo on or off
4976
4977              Specify on to enable echoing commands to standard output as they
4978              are read or off to disable.  The default is off.
4979
4980       -escape unix|windows
4981              Parse using unix or windows syntax
4982
4983              Commands must be parsed from the input stream and escaping needs
4984              to be used to protect spaces or quoting characters in the input.
4985              Specify  unix  to use unix-style command line parsing or windows
4986              for Microsoft Windows command shell style parsing.  The  default
4987              depends  on if the software is compiled for Microsoft Windows or
4988              for a Unix-type system (including Cygwin on Microsoft  Windows).
4989              It is recommended to use unix syntax because it is more powerful
4990              and more portable.
4991
4992       -fail text
4993              text to print if a command fails
4994
4995              When feedback is enabled, this specifies the text to print  when
4996              the command fails.  The default text is FAIL.
4997
4998       -feedback on|off
4999              enable error feedback
5000
5001              Print  text  (see  -pass  and -fail options) feedback after each
5002              command to indicate the result, the default is off.
5003
5004       -help
5005
5006              Prints batch command help.
5007
5008       -pass text
5009              text to print if a command passes
5010
5011              When feedback is enabled, this specifies the text to print  when
5012              the command passes.  The default text is PASS.
5013
5014       -prompt text
5015              Prompt text to use for command line
5016
5017              If  no  filename argument was specified, a simple command prompt
5018              appears where you may enter GraphicsMagick  commands.   The  de‐
5019              fault  prompt  is  GM>.  Use this option to change the prompt to
5020              something else.
5021
5022       -stop-on-error on|off
5023              Specify if command processing stops on error
5024
5025              Normally command processing continues if a command encounters an
5026              error.   Specify  -stop-on-error  on to cause processing to quit
5027              immediately on error.
5028

GM BENCHMARK

DESCRIPTION

5031       benchmark executes an arbitrary gm utility command (e.g.  convert)  for
5032       one  or more loops, and/or a specified execution time, and reports many
5033       execution metrics.  For builds using OpenMP, a mode is provided to exe‐
5034       cute  the  benchmark with an increasing number of threads and provide a
5035       report of speedup and multi-thread execution efficiency.  If  benchmark
5036       is  used to execute a command without any additional benchmark options,
5037       then the command is run once.
5038

EXAMPLES

5040       To obtain benchmark information for a single execution of a command:
5041
5042           gm benchmark convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5043       To obtain benchmark information from 100 iterations of the command:
5044
5045           gm benchmark -iterations 100 convert input.ppm \
5046             -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5047       To obtain benchmark information by iterating the command until a speci‐
5048       fied amount of time (in seconds) has been consumed:
5049
5050           gm benchmark -duration 30 convert input.ppm \
5051             -gaussian 0x1 output.ppm
5052       To  obtain  a  full  performance  report  with  an increasing number of
5053       threads (1-32 threads, stepping the number  of  threads  by  four  each
5054       time):
5055
5056           gm benchmark -duration 3 -stepthreads 4 convert \
5057             input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm
5058       Here is the interpretation of the output:
5059
5060           threads - number of threads used.
5061           iter - number of command iterations executed.
5062           user - total user time consumed.
5063           total - total elapsed time consumed.
5064           iter/s - number of command iterations per second.
5065           iter/cpu - amount of CPU time consumed per iteration.
5066           speedup - speedup compared with one thread.
5067           karp-flatt - Karp-Flatt measure of speedup efficiency.
5068
5069       Please  note that the reported "speedup" is based on the execution time
5070       of just one thread.  A preliminary warm-up pass is used  before  timing
5071       the first loop in order to ensure that the CPU is brought out of power-
5072       saving modes and that system caches are warmed up.   Most  modern  CPUs
5073       provide  a "turbo" mode where the CPU clock speed is increased (e.g. by
5074       a factor of two) when only one or two cores are  active.   If  the  CPU
5075       grows  excessively  hot (due to insufficient cooling), then it may dial
5076       back its clock rates as a form of thermal  management.   These  factors
5077       result in an under-reporting of speedup compared to if "turbo" mode was
5078       disabled and the CPU does not need to worry about  thermal  management.
5079       The  powertop  utility available under Linux and Solaris provides a way
5080       to observe CPU core clock rates while a benchmark is running.
5081

OPTIONS

5083        Options are processed from left to right and must  appear  before  any
5084       argument.
5085
5086       -duration duration
5087              duration  to  run benchmark Specify the number of seconds to run
5088              the benchmark. The command  is  executed  repeatedly  until  the
5089              specified amount of time has elapsed.
5090
5091       -help
5092
5093              Prints benchmark command help.
5094
5095       -iterations loops
5096              number of command iterations Specify the number of iterations to
5097              run the benchmark. The command is executed repeatedly until  the
5098              specified number of iterations has been reached.
5099
5100       -rawcsv
5101              Print  results  in CSV format Print results in a comma-separated
5102              value (CSV) format which is easy to parse for  plotting  or  im‐
5103              porting into a spreadsheet or database.  The values reported are
5104              threads, iterations, user_time, and elapsed_time.
5105
5106       -stepthreads step
5107              execute a per-thread benchmark ramp
5108               Execute a per-thread benchmark ramp, incrementing the number of
5109              threads at each step by the specified value.  The maximum number
5110              of threads is taken from the standard  OMP_NUM_THREADS  environ‐
5111              ment variable.
5112

GM COMPARE

5114       compare  compares  two  similar  images  using  a specified statistical
5115       method (see -metric) and/or by writing a difference image (-file), with
5116       the  altered pixels annotated using a specified method (see -highlight-
5117       style) and color (see -highlight-color). Reference-image is the  origi‐
5118       nal  image  and  compare-image is the (possibly) altered version, which
5119       should have the same dimensions as reference-image.
5120

EXAMPLES

5122       To compare two images using Mean Square Error (MSE) statistical  analy‐
5123       sis use:
5124
5125           gm compare -metric mse original.miff compare.miff
5126
5127       To create an annotated difference image use:
5128
5129           gm compare -highlight-style assign -highlight-color purple \
5130             -file diff.miff original.miff compare.miff
5131

OPTIONS

5133       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5134       the command line remains in effect only for  the  image  that  follows.
5135       All options are reset to their default values after each image is read.
5136
5137       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5138
5139
5140       -authenticate <string>
5141              decrypt image with this password
5142
5143       -auto-orient
5144              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
5145
5146       -colorspace <value>
5147              the type of colorspace
5148
5149       -compress <type>
5150              the type of image compression
5151
5152       -debug <events>
5153              enable debug printout
5154
5155       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5156              add coder/decoder specific options
5157
5158       -density <width>x<height>
5159              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5160
5161       -depth <value>
5162              depth of the image
5163
5164       -display <host:display[.screen]>
5165              specifies the X server to contact
5166
5167       -endian <type>
5168              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
5169
5170       -file <filename>
5171              write annotated difference image to file
5172
5173       -help  print usage instructions
5174
5175       -highlight-color <color>
5176              pixel annotation color
5177
5178       -highlight-style <style>
5179              pixel annotation style
5180
5181       -interlace <type>
5182              the type of interlacing scheme
5183
5184       -limit <type> <value>
5185              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
5186              resource limit
5187
5188       -log <string>
5189              Specify format for debug log
5190
5191       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
5192
5193       -maximum-error <limit>
5194              specifies the maximum amount of total image error
5195
5196       -metric <metric>
5197              comparison metric (MAE, MSE, PAE, PSNR, RMSE)
5198
5199       -monitor
5200              show progress indication
5201
5202       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
5203              chroma subsampling factors
5204
5205       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
5206              width and height of the image
5207
5208       -type <type>
5209              the image type
5210
5211       -verbose
5212              print detailed information about the image
5213
5214       -version
5215              print GraphicsMagick version string
5216
5217              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
5218              above.
5219
5220

GM COMPOSITE

5222       composite  composites (combines) images to create new images.  base-im‐
5223       age is the base image and change-image contains the changes.  ouput-im‐
5224       age is the result, and normally has the same dimensions as base-image.
5225
5226
5227       The  optional mask-image can be used to provide opacity information for
5228       change-image when it has none or if you want a different mask.  A  mask
5229       image  is typically grayscale and the same size as base-image. If mask-
5230       image is not grayscale, it is converted to grayscale and the  resulting
5231       intensities are used as opacity information.
5232

EXAMPLES

5234       To composite an image of a cockatoo with a perch, use:
5235
5236           gm composite cockatoo.miff perch.ras composite.miff
5237
5238       To compute the difference between images in a series, use:
5239
5240           gm composite -compose difference series.2 series.1
5241                     difference.miff
5242
5243       To  composite  an image of a cockatoo with a perch starting at location
5244       (100,150), use:
5245
5246           gm composite -geometry +100+150 cockatoo.miff
5247                     perch.ras composite.miff
5248
5249       To tile a logo across your image of a cockatoo, use
5250
5251           gm convert +shade 30x60 cockatoo.miff mask.miff
5252           gm composite -compose bumpmap -tile logo.png
5253                     cockatoo.miff mask.miff composite.miff
5254
5255       To composite a red, green, and blue color plane into a single composite
5256       image, try
5257
5258           gm composite -compose CopyGreen green.png red.png
5259                     red-green.png
5260           gm composite -compose CopyBlue blue.png red-green.png
5261                     gm composite.png
5262

OPTIONS

5264       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5265       the command line remains in effect only for  the  image  that  follows.
5266       All options are reset to their default values after each image is read.
5267
5268       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5269
5270
5271       -authenticate <string>
5272              decrypt image with this password
5273
5274       -background <color>
5275              the background color
5276
5277       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
5278              blue chromaticity primary point
5279
5280       -colors <value>
5281              preferred number of colors in the image
5282
5283       -colorspace <value>
5284              the type of colorspace
5285
5286       -comment <string>
5287              annotate an image with a comment
5288
5289       -compose <operator>
5290              the type of image composition
5291
5292       -compress <type>
5293              the type of image compression
5294
5295       -debug <events>
5296              enable debug printout
5297
5298       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5299              add coder/decoder specific options
5300
5301       -density <width>x<height>
5302              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5303
5304       -depth <value>
5305              depth of the image
5306
5307       -displace <horizontal scale>x<vertical scale>
5308              shift image pixels as defined by a displacement map
5309
5310       -display <host:display[.screen]>
5311              specifies the X server to contact
5312
5313       -dispose <method>
5314              GIF disposal method
5315
5316       -dissolve <percent>
5317              dissolve an image into another by the given percent
5318
5319       -dither
5320              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
5321
5322       -encoding <type>
5323              specify the text encoding
5324
5325       -endian <type>
5326              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
5327
5328       -filter <type>
5329              use this type of filter when resizing an image
5330
5331       -font <name>
5332              use this font when annotating the image with text
5333
5334       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
5335              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
5336
5337       -gravity <type>
5338              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
5339
5340       -green-primary <x>,<y>
5341              green chromaticity primary point
5342
5343       -help  print usage instructions
5344
5345       -interlace <type>
5346              the type of interlacing scheme
5347
5348       -label <name>
5349              assign a label to an image
5350
5351       -limit <type> <value>
5352              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
5353              resource limit
5354
5355       -log <string>
5356              Specify format for debug log
5357
5358       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
5359
5360       -monitor
5361              show progress indication
5362
5363       -monochrome
5364              transform the image to black and white
5365
5366       -negate
5367              replace every pixel with its complementary color
5368
5369       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
5370              size and location of an image canvas
5371
5372       -profile <filename>
5373              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
5374
5375       -quality <value>
5376              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
5377
5378       -recolor <matrix>
5379              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
5380
5381       -red-primary <x>,<y>
5382              red chromaticity primary point
5383
5384       -render
5385              render vector operations
5386
5387       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
5388              Adjust image page offsets
5389
5390       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
5391              resize an image
5392
5393       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
5394              rotate the image
5395
5396       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
5397              chroma subsampling factors
5398
5399       -scene <value>
5400              set scene number
5401
5402       -set <attribute> <value>
5403              set an image attribute
5404
5405       +set <attribute>
5406              unset an image attribute
5407
5408       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
5409              sharpen the image
5410
5411       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
5412              width and height of the image
5413
5414       -stegano <offset>
5415              hide watermark within an image
5416
5417       -stereo
5418              composite two images to create a stereo anaglyph
5419
5420       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
5421
5422       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
5423              resize an image (quickly)
5424
5425       -treedepth <value>
5426              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
5427
5428       -trim  trim an image
5429
5430       -type <type>
5431              the image type
5432
5433       -units <type>
5434              the units of image resolution
5435
5436       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
5437              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
5438
5439       -verbose
5440              print detailed information about the image
5441
5442       -version
5443              print GraphicsMagick version string
5444
5445       -watermark <brightness>x<saturation>
5446              percent brightness and saturation of a watermark
5447
5448       -white-point <x>,<y>
5449              chromaticity white point
5450
5451       -write <filename>
5452              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
5453
5454              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
5455              above.
5456
5457

GM CONJURE

5459       The  Magick  scripting language (MSL) will primarily benefit those that
5460       want to accomplish custom image processing tasks but  do  not  wish  to
5461       program,  or  those  that do not have access to a Perl interpreter or a
5462       compiler.  The interpreter is called conjure and  here  is  an  example
5463       script:
5464
5465           <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
5466           <image size="400x400" >
5467             <read filename="image.gif" />
5468             <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5469             <resize geometry="%[dimensions]" />
5470             <get width="width" height="height" />
5471             <print output=
5472               "Image sized from %[base-width]x%[base-height]
5473                to %[width]x%[height].\n" />
5474             <write filename="image.png" />
5475           </image>
5476
5477       invoked with
5478
5479           gm conjure -dimensions 400x400 incantation.msl
5480
5481       All operations will closely follow the key/value pairs defined in Perl‐
5482       Magick, unless otherwise noted.
5483

OPTIONS

5485       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
5486       the  command  line  remains in effect until it is explicitly changed by
5487       specifying the option again with  a  different  effect,  or  if  it  is
5488       changed by a statement in the scripting language.
5489
5490       You  can  define your own keyword/value pairs on the command line.  The
5491       script can then use this information when setting values  by  including
5492       %[keyword]  in  the  string.  For example, if you included "-dimensions
5493       400x400" on the command line, as illustrated  above,  then  any  string
5494       containing   "%[dimensions]"   would  have  400x400  substituted.   The
5495       "%[string]" can be  used  either  an  entire  string,  such  as  geome‐
5496       try="%[dimensions]"  or as a part of a string such as filename="%[base‐
5497       name].png".
5498
5499       The keyword can be any string except for the following reserved strings
5500       (in any upper, lower, or mixed case variant): debug, help, and verbose,
5501       whose usage is described below.
5502
5503       The value can be any string.  If either the keyword or the  value  con‐
5504       tains  white  space  or  any symbols that have special meanings to your
5505       shell such as "#", "|", or "%", enclose the string in  quotation  marks
5506       or use "\" to escape the white space and special symbols.
5507
5508       Keywords  and values are case dependent.  "Key", "key", and "KEY" would
5509       be three different keywords.
5510
5511       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5512
5513
5514       -debug <events>
5515              enable debug printout
5516
5517       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5518              add coder/decoder specific options
5519
5520       -help  print usage instructions
5521
5522       -log <string>
5523              Specify format for debug log
5524
5525       -verbose
5526              print detailed information about the image
5527
5528       -version
5529              print GraphicsMagick version string
5530

MAGICK SCRIPTING LANGUAGE

5532       The Magick Scripting Language (MSL) presently defines the following el‐
5533       ements and their attributes:
5534
5535               <image>
5536
5537                    background, color, id, size
5538
5539                    Define  a new image object.  </image> destroys it. Because
5540                    of this, if you wish  to  reference  multiple  "subimages"
5541                    (aka pages or layers), you can embed one image element in‐
5542                    side of another. For example:
5543
5544
5545
5546                        <image>
5547                        <read filename="input.png" />
5548                        <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5549                        <image height="base-height" width="base-width">
5550                        <image />
5551                        <write filename="output.mng" />
5552                        </image>
5553
5554
5555
5556                        <image size="400x400" />
5557
5558               <group>
5559
5560
5561                    Define a new group of image objects.  By  default,  images
5562                    are only valid for the life of their <image>element.
5563
5564
5565
5566                        <image>   -- creates the image
5567                        .....     -- do stuff with it
5568                        </image>  -- dispose of the image
5569
5570
5571                    However,  in  a  group, all images in that group will stay
5572                    around for the life of the group:
5573
5574
5575
5576                        <group>                           -- start a group
5577                            <image>                       -- create an image
5578                            ....                          -- do stuff
5579                            </image>                      -- NOOP
5580                            <image>                       -- create another image
5581                            ....                          -- do more stuff
5582                            </image>                      -- NOOP
5583                            <write filename="image.mng" />  -- output
5584                        </group>                          -- dispose of both images
5585
5586               <read>
5587
5588                        filename
5589
5590                    Read a new image from a disk file.
5591
5592
5593
5594                        <read filename="image.gif" />
5595
5596
5597                    To read two images use
5598
5599
5600
5601                        <read filename="image.gif" />
5602                        <read filename="image.png />
5603
5604               <write>
5605
5606                        filename
5607                    Write the image(s) to disk, either as a  single  multiple-
5608                    image file or multiple ones if necessary.
5609
5610
5611
5612                         <write filename=image.tiff" />
5613               <get>
5614
5615                    Get   any  attribute  recognized  by  PerlMagick's  GetAt‐
5616                    tribute() and stores it as an image  attribute  for  later
5617                    use. Currently only width and height are supported.
5618
5619
5620                        <get width="base-width" height="base-height" />
5621                        <print output="Image size is %[base-width]x%[base-height].\n" />
5622
5623               <set>
5624
5625                    background,  bordercolor,  clip-mask, colorspace, density,
5626                    magick, mattecolor, opacity.  Set an attribute  recognized
5627                    by PerlMagick's GetAttribute().
5628               <profile>
5629
5630                        [profilename]
5631
5632                    Read  one  or more IPTC, ICC or generic profiles from file
5633                    and assign to image
5634
5635
5636
5637                        <profile iptc="profile.iptc" generic="generic.dat" />
5638
5639
5640                    To remove a specified profile use "!" as the filename eg
5641
5642
5643
5644                        <profile icm="!" iptc="profile.iptc" />
5645
5646               <border>
5647
5648                        fill, geometry, height, width
5649               <blur>
5650
5651                        radius, sigma
5652               <charcoal>
5653
5654                        radius, sigma
5655               <chop>
5656
5657                        geometry, height, width, x, y
5658               <crop>
5659
5660                        geometry, height, width, x, y
5661               <composite>
5662
5663                        compose, geometry, gravity, image, x, y
5664
5665
5666                        <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
5667                        <group>
5668                            <image id="image_01">
5669                                <read filename="cloud3.gif"/>
5670                                <resize geometry="250x90"/>
5671                            </image>
5672                            <image id="image_02">
5673                                <read filename="cloud4.gif"/>
5674                                <resize geometry="190x100"/>
5675                            </image>
5676                            <image>
5677                                <read filename="background.jpg"/>
5678                                <composite image="image_01" geometry="+740+470"/>
5679                                <composite image="image_02" geometry="+390+415"/>
5680                            </image>
5681                            <write filename="result.png"/>
5682                        </group>
5683
5684               <despeckle>
5685
5686               <emboss>
5687
5688                        radius, sigma
5689               <enhance>
5690
5691               <equalize>
5692
5693               <edge>
5694
5695                        radius
5696               <flip>
5697
5698               <flop>
5699
5700               <frame>
5701
5702                        fill, geometry, height, width, x, y, inner, outer
5703               <flatten>
5704
5705               <get>
5706
5707                        height, width
5708               <gamma>
5709
5710                        red, green, blue
5711               <image>
5712
5713                        background, color, id, size
5714               <implode>
5715
5716                        amount
5717               <magnify>
5718
5719               <minify>
5720
5721               <medianfilter>
5722
5723                        radius
5724               <normalize>
5725
5726               <oilpaint>
5727
5728                        radius
5729               <print>
5730
5731                        output
5732               <profile>
5733
5734                        [profilename]
5735               <read>
5736
5737               <resize>
5738
5739                        blur, filter, geometry, height, width
5740               <roll>
5741
5742                        geometry, x, y
5743               <rotate>
5744
5745                        degrees
5746               <reducenoise>
5747
5748                        radius
5749               <sample>
5750
5751                        geometry, height, width
5752               <scale>
5753
5754                        geometry, height, width
5755               <sharpen>
5756
5757                        radius, sigma
5758               <shave>
5759
5760                        geometry, height, width
5761               <shear>
5762
5763                        x, y
5764               <solarize>
5765
5766                        threshold
5767               <spread>
5768
5769                        radius
5770               <stegano>
5771
5772                        image
5773               <stereo>
5774
5775                        image
5776               <swirl>
5777
5778                        degrees
5779               <texture>
5780
5781                        image
5782               <threshold>
5783
5784                        threshold
5785               <transparent>
5786
5787                        color
5788               <trim>
5789
5790
5791

GM CONVERT

5793       Convert converts an input file using one image format to an output file
5794       with a differing image format. In addition, various types of image pro‐
5795       cessing can be performed on the converted image during  the  conversion
5796       process.  Convert  recognizes  the image formats listed in GraphicsMag‐
5797       ick(1).
5798
5799

EXAMPLES

5801       To make a thumbnail of a JPEG image, use:
5802
5803           gm convert -size 120x120 cockatoo.jpg -resize 120x120
5804                   +profile "*" thumbnail.jpg
5805
5806       In this example, '-size 120x120' gives a hint to the JPEG decoder  that
5807       the  image  is  going  to  be downscaled to 120x120, allowing it to run
5808       faster by avoiding returning full-resolution images  to  GraphicsMagick
5809       for the subsequent resizing operation.  The ´-resize 120x120' specifies
5810       the desired dimensions of the output image.  It will be scaled  so  its
5811       largest  dimension  is 120 pixels.  The ´+profile "*"' removes any ICM,
5812       EXIF, IPTC, or other profiles that might be present in  the  input  and
5813       aren't needed in the thumbnail.
5814
5815       To convert a MIFF image of a cockatoo to a SUN raster image, use:
5816
5817           gm convert cockatoo.miff sun:cockatoo.ras
5818
5819       To  convert  a  multi-page PostScript document to individual FAX pages,
5820       use:
5821
5822           gm convert -monochrome document.ps fax:page
5823
5824       To convert a TIFF image to a PostScript A4 page with the image  in  the
5825       lower left-hand corner, use:
5826
5827           gm convert -page A4+0+0 image.tiff document.ps
5828
5829       To  convert  a  raw  Gray  image  with  a 128 byte header to a portable
5830       graymap, use:
5831
5832           gm convert -depth 8 -size 768x512+128 gray:raw
5833                   image.pgm
5834
5835       In this example, "raw" is the input file.  Its format is "gray" and  it
5836       has  the  dimensions  and number of header bytes specified by the -size
5837       option and the sample depth specified by the -depth option.  The output
5838       file is "image.pgm".  The suffix ".pgm" specifies its format.
5839
5840       To convert a Photo CD image to a TIFF image, use:
5841
5842           gm convert -size 1536x1024 img0009.pcd image.tiff
5843           gm convert img0009.pcd[4] image.tiff
5844
5845       To create a visual image directory of all your JPEG images, use:
5846
5847           gm convert 'vid:*.jpg' directory.miff
5848
5849       To  annotate  an  image  with  blue  text  using font 12x24 at position
5850       (100,100), use:
5851
5852           gm convert -font helvetica -fill blue
5853                   -draw "text 100,100 Cockatoo"
5854                   bird.jpg bird.miff
5855
5856       To tile a 640x480 image with a JPEG texture with bumps use:
5857
5858           gm convert -size 640x480 tile:bumps.jpg tiled.png
5859
5860       To surround an icon with an ornamental border to  use  with  Mosaic(1),
5861       use:
5862
5863           gm convert -mattecolor "#697B8F" -frame 6x6 bird.jpg
5864                   icon.png
5865
5866       To create a MNG animation from a DNA molecule sequence, use:
5867
5868           gm convert -delay 20 dna.* dna.mng
5869

OPTIONS

5871       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
5872       the command line remains in effect for the set of images that  follows,
5873       until  the  set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
5874       Some options only affect the decoding of images and others only the en‐
5875       coding.  The latter can appear after the final group of input images.
5876
5877       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
5878
5879
5880       -adjoin
5881              join images into a single multi-image file
5882
5883       -affine <matrix>
5884              drawing transform matrix
5885
5886       -antialias
5887              remove pixel aliasing
5888
5889       -append
5890              append a set of images
5891
5892       -asc-cdl <spec>
5893              apply ASC CDL color transform
5894
5895       -authenticate <string>
5896              decrypt image with this password
5897
5898       -auto-orient
5899              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
5900
5901       -average
5902              average a set of images
5903
5904       -background <color>
5905              the background color
5906
5907       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
5908              pixels below the threshold become black
5909
5910       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
5911              blue chromaticity primary point
5912
5913       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
5914              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
5915
5916       -border <width>x<height>
5917              surround the image with a border of color
5918
5919       -bordercolor <color>
5920              the border color
5921
5922       -box <color>
5923              set the color of the annotation bounding box
5924
5925       -channel <type>
5926              the type of channel
5927
5928       -charcoal <factor>
5929              simulate a charcoal drawing
5930
5931       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
5932              remove pixels from the interior of an image
5933
5934       -clip  apply the clipping path, if one is present
5935
5936       -coalesce
5937              merge a sequence of images
5938
5939       -colorize <value>
5940              colorize the image with the pen color
5941
5942       -colors <value>
5943              preferred number of colors in the image
5944
5945       -colorspace <value>
5946              the type of colorspace
5947
5948       -comment <string>
5949              annotate an image with a comment
5950
5951       -compose <operator>
5952              the type of image composition
5953
5954       -compress <type>
5955              the type of image compression
5956
5957       -contrast
5958              enhance or reduce the image contrast
5959
5960       -convolve <kernel>
5961              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
5962
5963       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
5964              preferred size and location of the cropped image
5965
5966       -cycle <amount>
5967              displace image colormap by amount
5968
5969       -debug <events>
5970              enable debug printout
5971
5972       -deconstruct
5973              break down an image sequence into constituent parts
5974
5975       -define <key>{=<value>},...
5976              add coder/decoder specific options
5977
5978       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
5979              display the next image after pausing
5980
5981       -density <width>x<height>
5982              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
5983
5984       -depth <value>
5985              depth of the image
5986
5987       -despeckle
5988              reduce the speckles within an image
5989
5990       -display <host:display[.screen]>
5991              specifies the X server to contact
5992
5993       -dispose <method>
5994              GIF disposal method
5995
5996       -dither
5997              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
5998
5999       -draw <string>
6000              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
6001
6002       -edge <radius>
6003              detect edges within an image
6004
6005       -emboss <radius>
6006              emboss an image
6007
6008       -encoding <type>
6009              specify the text encoding
6010
6011       -endian <type>
6012              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
6013
6014       -enhance
6015              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
6016
6017       -equalize
6018              perform histogram equalization to the image
6019
6020       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6021              composite image on background color canvas image
6022
6023       -fill <color>
6024              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
6025
6026       -filter <type>
6027              use this type of filter when resizing an image
6028
6029       -flatten
6030              flatten a sequence of images
6031
6032       -flip  create a "mirror image"
6033
6034       -flop  create a "mirror image"
6035
6036       -font <name>
6037              use this font when annotating the image with text
6038
6039       -format <string>
6040              output formatted image characteristics
6041
6042       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
6043              surround the image with an ornamental border
6044
6045       -fuzz <distance>{%}
6046              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
6047
6048       -gamma <value>
6049              level of gamma correction
6050
6051       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
6052              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
6053
6054       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
6055              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
6056
6057       -gravity <type>
6058              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
6059
6060       -green-primary <x>,<y>
6061              green chromaticity primary point
6062
6063       -hald-clut <clut>
6064              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
6065
6066       -help  print usage instructions
6067
6068       -implode <factor>
6069              implode image pixels about the center
6070
6071       -intent <type>
6072              use this type of rendering intent when managing the image color
6073
6074       -interlace <type>
6075              the type of interlacing scheme
6076
6077       -label <name>
6078              assign a label to an image
6079
6080       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
6081              perform local adaptive thresholding
6082
6083       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
6084              adjust the level of image contrast
6085
6086       -limit <type> <value>
6087              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
6088              resource limit
6089
6090       -list <type>
6091              the type of list
6092
6093       -log <string>
6094              Specify format for debug log
6095
6096       -loop <iterations>
6097              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
6098
6099       -magnify
6100              magnify the image
6101
6102       -map <filename>
6103              choose a particular set of colors from this image
6104
6105       -mask <filename>
6106              Specify a clipping mask
6107
6108       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
6109
6110       -mattecolor <color>
6111              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
6112
6113       -median <radius>
6114              apply a median filter to the image
6115
6116       -minify <factor>
6117              minify the image
6118
6119       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
6120              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
6121
6122       -monitor
6123              show progress indication
6124
6125       -monochrome
6126              transform the image to black and white
6127
6128       -morph <frames>
6129              morphs an image sequence
6130
6131       -mosaic
6132              create a mosaic from an image or an image sequence
6133
6134       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
6135              Simulate motion blur
6136
6137       -negate
6138              replace every pixel with its complementary color
6139
6140       -noise <radius|type>
6141              add or reduce noise in an image
6142
6143       -noop  NOOP (no option)
6144
6145       -normalize
6146              transform image to span the full range of color values
6147
6148       -opaque <color>
6149              change this color to the pen color within the image
6150
6151       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
6152              apply a mathematical, bitwise, or value  operator  to  an  image
6153              channel
6154
6155       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
6156              ordered dither the image
6157
6158       -orient <orientation>
6159              Set the image orientation attribute
6160
6161       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
6162              size and location of an image canvas
6163
6164       -paint <radius>
6165              simulate an oil painting
6166
6167       -pen <color>
6168              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
6169
6170       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
6171
6172       -pointsize <value>
6173              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
6174
6175       -preview <type>
6176              image preview type
6177
6178       -process <command>
6179              process a sequence of images using a process module
6180
6181       -profile <filename>
6182              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
6183
6184       -quality <value>
6185              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
6186
6187       -raise <width>x<height>
6188              lighten or darken image edges
6189
6190       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
6191              random threshold the image
6192
6193       -recolor <matrix>
6194              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
6195
6196       -red-primary <x>,<y>
6197              red chromaticity primary point
6198
6199       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6200              apply options to a portion of the image
6201
6202       -render
6203              render vector operations
6204
6205       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
6206              Adjust image page offsets
6207
6208       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
6209              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
6210
6211       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
6212              resize an image
6213
6214       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6215              roll an image vertically or horizontally
6216
6217       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
6218              rotate the image
6219
6220       -sample <geometry>
6221              scale image using pixel sampling
6222
6223       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
6224              chroma subsampling factors
6225
6226       -scale <geometry>
6227              scale the image.
6228
6229       -scene <value>
6230              set scene number
6231
6232       -set <attribute> <value>
6233              set an image attribute
6234
6235       +set <attribute>
6236              unset an image attribute
6237
6238       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
6239              segment an image
6240
6241       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
6242              shade the image using a distant light source
6243
6244       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
6245              sharpen the image
6246
6247       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
6248              shave pixels from the image edges
6249
6250       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
6251              shear the image along the X or Y axis
6252
6253       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
6254              width and height of the image
6255
6256       -solarize <factor>
6257              negate all pixels above the threshold level
6258
6259       -spread <amount>
6260              displace image pixels by a random amount
6261
6262       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
6263
6264       -stroke <color>
6265              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
6266
6267       -strokewidth <value>
6268              set the stroke width
6269
6270       -swirl <degrees>
6271              swirl image pixels about the center
6272
6273       -texture <filename>
6274              name of texture to tile onto the image background
6275
6276       -threshold <value>{%}
6277              threshold the image
6278
6279       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
6280              resize an image (quickly)
6281
6282       -tile <filename>
6283              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
6284
6285       -transform
6286              transform the image
6287
6288       -transparent <color>
6289              make this color transparent within the image
6290
6291       -treedepth <value>
6292              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
6293
6294       -trim  trim an image
6295
6296       -type <type>
6297              the image type
6298
6299       -units <type>
6300              the units of image resolution
6301
6302       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
6303              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
6304
6305       -use-pixmap
6306              use the pixmap
6307
6308       -verbose
6309              print detailed information about the image
6310
6311       -version
6312              print GraphicsMagick version string
6313
6314       -view <string>
6315              FlashPix viewing parameters
6316
6317       -virtual-pixel <method>
6318              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
6319
6320       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
6321              alter an image along a sine wave
6322
6323       -white-point <x>,<y>
6324              chromaticity white point
6325
6326       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
6327              pixels above the threshold become white
6328
6329       -write <filename>
6330              write an intermediate image [convert, composite]
6331
6332              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
6333              above.
6334

GM DISPLAY

6336       Display is a machine architecture independent image processing and dis‐
6337       play program. It can display an image on any workstation screen running
6338       an X server. Display can read and write many of the more popular  image
6339       formats (e.g. JPEG, TIFF, PNM, Photo CD, etc.).
6340
6341       With display, you can perform these functions on an image:
6342
6343                o  load an image from a file
6344                o  display the next image
6345                o  display the former image
6346                o  display a sequence of images as a slide show
6347                o  write the image to a file
6348                o  print the image to a PostScript printer
6349                o  delete the image file
6350                o  create a Visual Image Directory
6351                o   select  the  image to display by its thumbnail rather than
6352               name
6353                o  undo last image transformation
6354                o  copy a region of the image
6355                o  paste a region to the image
6356                o  restore the image to its original size
6357                o  refresh the image
6358                o  half the image size
6359                o  double the image size
6360                o  resize the image
6361                o  crop the image
6362                o  cut the image
6363                o  flop image in the horizontal direction
6364                o  flip image in the vertical direction
6365                o  rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise
6366                o  rotate the image 90 degrees counter-clockwise
6367                o  rotate the image
6368                o  shear the image
6369                o  roll the image
6370                o  trim the image edges
6371                o  invert the colors of the image
6372                o  vary the color brightness
6373                o  vary the color saturation
6374                o  vary the image hue
6375                o  gamma correct the image
6376                o  sharpen the image contrast
6377                o  dull the image contrast
6378                o  perform histogram equalization on the image
6379                o  perform histogram normalization on the image
6380                o  negate the image colors
6381                o  convert the image to grayscale
6382                o  set the maximum number of unique colors in the image
6383                o  reduce the speckles within an image
6384                o  eliminate peak noise from an image
6385                o  detect edges within the image
6386                o  emboss an image
6387                o  segment the image by color
6388                o  simulate an oil painting
6389                o  simulate a charcoal drawing
6390                o  annotate the image with text
6391                o  draw on the image
6392                o  edit an image pixel color
6393                o  edit the image matte information
6394                o  composite an image with another
6395                o  add a border to the image
6396                o  surround image with an ornamental border
6397                o  apply image processing techniques to a region of interest
6398                o  display information about the image
6399                o  zoom a portion of the image
6400                o  show a histogram of the image
6401                o  display image to background of a window
6402                o  set user preferences
6403                o  display information about this program
6404                o  discard all images and exit program
6405                o  change the level of magnification
6406                o  display images specified by a World Wide Web (WWW)  uniform
6407               resource locator (URL)
6408
6409

EXAMPLES

6411       To  scale an image of a cockatoo to exactly 640 pixels in width and 480
6412       pixels in height and position the window at location (200,200), use:
6413
6414           gm display -geometry 640x480+200+200! cockatoo.miff
6415
6416       To display an image of a cockatoo without a border centered on a  back‐
6417       drop, use:
6418
6419           gm display +borderwidth -backdrop cockatoo.miff
6420
6421       To tile a slate texture onto the root window, use:
6422
6423           gm display -size 1280x1024 -window root slate.png
6424
6425       To display a visual image directory of all your JPEG images, use:
6426
6427           gm display 'vid:*.jpg'
6428
6429       To  display  a  MAP image that is 640 pixels in width and 480 pixels in
6430       height with 256 colors, use:
6431
6432           gm display -size 640x480+256 cockatoo.map
6433
6434       To display an image of a cockatoo specified with a World Wide Web (WWW)
6435       uniform resource locator (URL), use:
6436
6437           gm display ftp://wizards.dupont.com/images/cockatoo.jpg
6438
6439       To display histogram of an image, use:
6440
6441           gm gm convert file.jpg HISTOGRAM:- | gm display -
6442

OPTIONS

6444       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
6445       the command line remains in effect until it is  explicitly  changed  by
6446       specifying  the  option  again  with a different effect. For example to
6447       display three images, the first with 32 colors, the second with an  un‐
6448       limited number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors, use:
6449
6450           gm display -colors 32 cockatoo.miff -noop duck.miff
6451                        -colors 16 macaw.miff
6452
6453       Display  options  can appear on the command line or in your X resources
6454       file. See X(1). Options on the command line supersede values  specified
6455       in your X resources file.
6456
6457       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
6458
6459
6460       -authenticate <string>
6461              decrypt image with this password
6462
6463       -backdrop
6464              display the image centered on a backdrop.
6465
6466       -background <color>
6467              the background color
6468
6469       -border <width>x<height>
6470              surround the image with a border of color
6471
6472       -bordercolor <color>
6473              the border color
6474
6475       -borderwidth <geometry>
6476              the border width
6477
6478       -colormap <type>
6479              define the colormap type
6480
6481       -colors <value>
6482              preferred number of colors in the image
6483
6484       -colorspace <value>
6485              the type of colorspace
6486
6487       -comment <string>
6488              annotate an image with a comment
6489
6490       -compress <type>
6491              the type of image compression
6492
6493       -contrast
6494              enhance or reduce the image contrast
6495
6496       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
6497              preferred size and location of the cropped image
6498
6499       -debug <events>
6500              enable debug printout
6501
6502       -define <key>{=<value>},...
6503              add coder/decoder specific options
6504
6505       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
6506              display the next image after pausing
6507
6508       -density <width>x<height>
6509              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
6510
6511       -depth <value>
6512              depth of the image
6513
6514       -despeckle
6515              reduce the speckles within an image
6516
6517       -display <host:display[.screen]>
6518              specifies the X server to contact
6519
6520       -dispose <method>
6521              GIF disposal method
6522
6523       -dither
6524              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
6525
6526       -edge <radius>
6527              detect edges within an image
6528
6529       -endian <type>
6530              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
6531
6532       -enhance
6533              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
6534
6535       -filter <type>
6536              use this type of filter when resizing an image
6537
6538       -flip  create a "mirror image"
6539
6540       -flop  create a "mirror image"
6541
6542       -font <name>
6543              use this font when annotating the image with text
6544
6545       -foreground <color>
6546              define the foreground color
6547
6548       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
6549              surround the image with an ornamental border
6550
6551       -gamma <value>
6552              level of gamma correction
6553
6554       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
6555              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
6556
6557       -help  print usage instructions
6558
6559       -iconGeometry <geometry>
6560              specify the icon geometry
6561
6562       -iconic
6563              iconic animation
6564
6565       -immutable
6566              make image immutable
6567
6568       -interlace <type>
6569              the type of interlacing scheme
6570
6571       -label <name>
6572              assign a label to an image
6573
6574       -limit <type> <value>
6575              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
6576              resource limit
6577
6578       -log <string>
6579              Specify format for debug log
6580
6581       -magnify <factor>
6582              magnify the image
6583
6584       -map <type>
6585              display image using this type.
6586
6587       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
6588
6589       -mattecolor <color>
6590              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
6591
6592       -monitor
6593              show progress indication
6594
6595       -monochrome
6596              transform the image to black and white
6597
6598       -name  name an image
6599
6600       -negate
6601              replace every pixel with its complementary color
6602
6603       -noop  NOOP (no option)
6604
6605       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
6606              size and location of an image canvas
6607
6608       +progress
6609              disable progress monitor and busy cursor
6610
6611       -quality <value>
6612              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
6613
6614       -raise <width>x<height>
6615              lighten or darken image edges
6616
6617       -remote
6618              perform a X11 remote operation
6619
6620       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
6621              roll an image vertically or horizontally
6622
6623       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
6624              rotate the image
6625
6626       -sample <geometry>
6627              scale image using pixel sampling
6628
6629       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
6630              chroma subsampling factors
6631
6632       -scenes <value-value>
6633              range of image scene numbers to read
6634
6635       -set <attribute> <value>
6636              set an image attribute
6637
6638       +set <attribute>
6639              unset an image attribute
6640
6641       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
6642              segment an image
6643
6644       -shared-memory
6645              use shared memory
6646
6647       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
6648              sharpen the image
6649
6650       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
6651              width and height of the image
6652
6653       -text-font <name>
6654              font for writing fixed-width text
6655
6656       -texture <filename>
6657              name of texture to tile onto the image background
6658
6659       -title <string>
6660              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
6661
6662       -treedepth <value>
6663              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
6664
6665       -trim  trim an image
6666
6667       -type <type>
6668              the image type
6669
6670       -update <seconds>
6671               detect when image file is modified and redisplay.
6672
6673       -use-pixmap
6674              use the pixmap
6675
6676       -verbose
6677              print detailed information about the image
6678
6679       -version
6680              print GraphicsMagick version string
6681
6682       -visual <type>
6683              animate images using this X visual type
6684
6685       -window <id>
6686              make image the background of a window
6687
6688       -window-group
6689              specify the window group
6690
6691       -write <filename>
6692              write the image to a file [display]
6693
6694              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
6695              above.
6696
6697

MOUSE BUTTONS

6699       The  effects of each button press is described below. Three buttons are
6700       required. If you have a two button mouse, button 1 and 3 are  returned.
6701       Press ALT and button 3 to simulate button 2.
6702
6703       1        Press this button to map or unmap the Command widget . See the
6704              next section for more information about the Command widget.
6705
6706       2       Press and drag to define a region of the image to magnify.
6707
6708       3       Press and drag to choose from a select set of  display(1)  com‐
6709              mands.  This  button behaves differently if the image being dis‐
6710              played is a visual image directory. Choose a particular tile  of
6711              the directory and press this button and drag to select a command
6712              from a pop-up menu.  Choose from these menu items:
6713
6714                  Open
6715                  Next
6716                  Former
6717                  Delete
6718                  Update
6719
6720
6721              If you choose Open, the image represented by the  tile  is  dis‐
6722              played.   To  return  to the visual image directory, choose Next
6723              from the Command widget (refer to  Command  Widget).   Next  and
6724              Former  moves  to  the next or former image respectively. Choose
6725              Delete to delete a particular image tile. Finally, choose Update
6726              to synchronize all the image tiles with their respective images.
6727              See montage and miff for more details.
6728

COMMAND WIDGET

6730       The Command widget lists a number of sub-menus and commands. They are
6731
6732           File
6733
6734           Open...
6735           Next
6736           Former
6737           Select...
6738           Save...
6739           Print...
6740           Delete...
6741           Canvas...
6742           Visual Directory...
6743           Quit
6744
6745
6746
6747           Edit
6748
6749           Undo
6750           Redo
6751           Cut
6752           Copy
6753           Paste
6754
6755
6756
6757           View
6758
6759           Half Size
6760           Original Size
6761           Double Size
6762           Resize...
6763           Apply
6764           Refresh
6765           Restore
6766
6767
6768
6769           Transform
6770
6771           Crop
6772           Chop
6773           Flop
6774           Flip
6775           Rotate Right
6776           Rotate Left
6777           Rotate...
6778           Shear...
6779           Roll...
6780           Trim Edges
6781
6782
6783
6784           Enhance
6785
6786           Hue...
6787           Saturation...
6788           Brightness...
6789           Gamma...
6790           Spiff...
6791           Dull
6792           Equalize
6793           Normalize
6794           Negate
6795           GRAYscale
6796           Quantize...
6797
6798
6799
6800           Effects
6801
6802           Despeckle
6803           Emboss
6804           Reduce Noise
6805           Add Noise
6806           Sharpen...
6807           Blur...
6808           Threshold...
6809           Edge Detect...
6810           Spread...
6811           Shade...
6812           Raise...
6813           Segment...
6814
6815
6816
6817           F/X
6818
6819           Solarize...
6820           Swirl...
6821           Implode...
6822           Wave...
6823           Oil Paint...
6824           Charcoal Draw...
6825
6826
6827
6828           Image Edit
6829
6830           Annotate...
6831           Draw...
6832           Color...
6833           Matte...
6834           Composite...
6835           Add Border...
6836           Add Frame...
6837           Comment...
6838           Launch...
6839           Region of Interest...
6840
6841
6842
6843           Miscellany
6844
6845           Image Info
6846           Zoom Image
6847           Show Preview...
6848           Show Histogram
6849           Show Matte
6850           Background...
6851           Slide Show
6852           Preferences...
6853
6854
6855
6856           Help
6857
6858           Overview
6859           Browse Documentation
6860           About Display
6861
6862
6863
6864       Menu items with a indented triangle have a sub-menu.  They  are  repre‐
6865       sented above as the indented items. To access a sub-menu item, move the
6866       pointer to the appropriate menu and press button 1 and drag.  When  you
6867       find  the  desired sub-menu item, release the button and the command is
6868       executed.  Move the pointer away from the sub-menu if you decide not to
6869       execute a particular command.
6870

KEYBOARD ACCELERATORS

6872       Accelerators  are  one or two key presses that effect a particular com‐
6873       mand.  The keyboard accelerators that display understands is:
6874
6875           Ctl+O     Press to load an image from a file.
6876           space     Press to display the next image.
6877
6878       If the image is a multi-paged document such as a  PostScript  document,
6879       you  can skip ahead several pages by preceding this command with a num‐
6880       ber.  For example to display the fourth page beyond the  current  page,
6881       press 4space.
6882
6883           backspace Press to display the former image.
6884
6885       If  the  image is a multi-paged document such as a PostScript document,
6886       you can skip behind several pages by preceding this command with a num‐
6887       ber.   For  example  to  display  the fourth page preceding the current
6888       page, press 4n.
6889
6890           Ctl-S    Press to save the image to a file.
6891           Ctl-P    Press to print the image to a
6892                    PostScript printer.
6893           Ctl-D    Press to delete an image file.
6894           Ctl-N    Press to create a blank canvas.
6895           Ctl-Q    Press to discard all images and exit program.
6896           Ctl+Z    Press to undo last image transformation.
6897           Ctl+R    Press to redo last image transformation.
6898           Ctl-X    Press to cut a region of
6899                    the image.
6900           Ctl-C    Press to copy a region of
6901                    the image.
6902           Ctl-V    Press to paste a region to
6903                    the image.
6904           <        Press to halve the image size.
6905           .        Press to return to the original image size.
6906           >        Press to double the image size.
6907           %        Press to resize the image to a width and height
6908                    you specify.
6909           Cmd-A    Press to make any image transformations
6910                    permanent.
6911                    By default, any image size transformations are
6912                    applied to the original image to create the
6913                    image displayed on the X server.  However, the
6914                    transformations are not permanent (i.e. the
6915                    original image does not change size only the
6916                    X image does). For example, if you press ">"
6917                    the X image will appear to double in size, but
6918                    the original image will in fact remain the same
6919                    size.  To force the original image to double in
6920                    size, press ">" followed by "Cmd-A".
6921           @        Press to refresh the image window.
6922           C        Press to crop the image.
6923           [        Press to chop the image.
6924           H        Press to flop image in the horizontal direction.
6925           V        Press to flip image in the vertical direction.
6926           /        Press to rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise.
6927           \        Press to rotate the image 90 degrees
6928                    counter-clockwise.
6929           *        Press to rotate the image
6930                    the number of degrees you specify.
6931           S        Press to shear the image the number of degrees
6932                    you specify.
6933           R        Press to roll the image.
6934           T        Press to trim the image edges.
6935           Shft-H   Press to vary the color hue.
6936           Shft-S   Press to vary the color saturation.
6937           Shft-L   Press to vary the image brightness.
6938           Shft-G   Press to gamma correct the image.
6939           Shft-C   Press to spiff up the image contrast.
6940           Shft-Z   Press to dull the image contrast.
6941           =        Press to perform histogram equalization on
6942                    the image.
6943           Shft-N   Press to perform histogram normalization on
6944                    the image.
6945           Shft-~   Press to negate the colors of the image.
6946           .        Press to convert the image colors to gray.
6947           Shft-#   Press to set the maximum number of unique
6948                    colors in the image.
6949           F2       Press to reduce the speckles in an image.
6950           F2       Press to emboss an image.
6951           F4       Press to eliminate peak noise from an image.
6952           F5       Press to add noise to an image.
6953           F6       Press to sharpen an image.
6954           F7       Press to blur image an image.
6955           F8       Press to threshold the image.
6956           F9       Press to detect edges within an image.
6957           F10      Press to displace pixels by a random amount.
6958           F11      Press to shade the image using a distant light
6959                    source.
6960           F12      Press to lighten or darken image edges to
6961                    create a 3-D effect.
6962           F13      Press to segment the image by color.
6963           Meta-S   Press to swirl image pixels about the center.
6964           Meta-I   Press to implode image pixels about the center.
6965           Meta-W   Press to alter an image along a sine wave.
6966           Meta-P   Press to simulate an oil painting.
6967           Meta-C   Press to simulate a charcoal drawing.
6968           Alt-X    Press to composite the image
6969                    with another.
6970           Alt-A    Press to annotate the image with text.
6971           Alt-D    Press to draw a line on the image.
6972           Alt-P    Press to edit an image pixel color.
6973           Alt-M    Press to edit the image matte information.
6974           Alt-X    Press to composite the image with another.
6975           Alt-A    Press to add a border to the image.
6976           Alt-F    Press to add a ornamental frame to the image.
6977           Alt-Shft-!   Press to add an image comment.
6978           Ctl-A    Press to apply image processing techniques to a
6979                    region of interest.
6980           Shft-?   Press to display information about the image.
6981           Shft-+   Press to map the zoom image window.
6982           Shft-P   Press to preview an image enhancement, effect,
6983                    or f/x.
6984           F1       Press to display helpful information about
6985                    the "display" utility.
6986           Find     Press to browse documentation about
6987                    GraphicsMagick.
6988           1-9      Press to change the level of magnification.
6989
6990       Use the arrow keys to move the image one pixel up, down, left, or right
6991       within  the  magnify window. Be sure to first map the magnify window by
6992       pressing button 2.
6993
6994       Press ALT and one of the arrow keys to trim off one pixel from any side
6995       of the image.
6996

X RESOURCES

6998       Display  options  can  appear on the command line or in your X resource
6999       file. Options on the command line supersede values specified in your  X
7000       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
7001
7002       Most display options have a corresponding X resource. In addition, dis‐
7003       play uses the following X resources:
7004
7005       background (class Background)
7006               Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window back‐
7007              ground. The default is #ccc.
7008
7009       borderColor (class BorderColor)
7010                Specifies the preferred color to use for the Image window bor‐
7011              der. The default is #ccc.
7012
7013       borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
7014               Specifies the width in pixels of the image window  border.  The
7015              default is 2.
7016
7017       browseCommand (class browseCommand)
7018                Specifies  the  name  of the preferred browser when displaying
7019              GraphicsMagick documentation. The default is netscape %s.
7020
7021       confirmExit (class ConfirmExit)
7022               Display pops up a dialog box to  confirm  exiting  the  program
7023              when  exiting  the  program.  Set this resource to False to exit
7024              without a confirmation.
7025
7026       displayGamma (class DisplayGamma)
7027               Specifies the gamma of the X server.  You  can  apply  separate
7028              gamma  values  to the red, green, and blue channels of the image
7029              with  a  gamma  value  list  delineated   with   slashes   (i.e.
7030              1.7/2.3/1.2).  The default is 2.2.
7031
7032       displayWarnings (class DisplayWarnings)
7033               Display pops up a dialog box whenever a warning message occurs.
7034              Set this resource to False to ignore warning messages.
7035
7036       font (class FontList)
7037               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in normal  for‐
7038              matted text.  The default is 14 point Helvetica.
7039
7040       font[1-9] (class Font[1-9])
7041               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use when annotating
7042              the image window with text. The default fonts are  fixed,  vari‐
7043              able, 5x8, 6x10, 7x13bold, 8x13bold, 9x15bold, 10x20, and 12x24.
7044
7045       foreground (class Foreground)
7046                Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the image
7047              window.  The default is black.
7048
7049       gammaCorrect (class gammaCorrect)
7050               This resource, if true, will lighten  or  darken  an  image  of
7051              known gamma to match the gamma of the display (see resource dis‐
7052              playGamma). The default is True.
7053
7054       geometry (class Geometry)
7055               Specifies the preferred size and position of the image  window.
7056              It is not necessarily obeyed by all window managers.
7057
7058              Offsets,  if  present,  are handled in X(1) style.  A negative x
7059              offset is measured from the right edge  of  the  screen  to  the
7060              right edge of the icon, and a negative y offset is measured from
7061              the bottom edge of the screen to the bottom edge of the icon.
7062
7063       iconGeometry (class IconGeometry)
7064               Specifies the preferred size and position  of  the  application
7065              when iconified.  It is not necessarily obeyed by all window man‐
7066              agers.
7067
7068              Offsets, if present, are handled in the same manner as in  class
7069              Geometry.
7070
7071       iconic (class Iconic)
7072               This resource indicates that you would prefer that the applica‐
7073              tion's windows initially not be visible as if the windows had be
7074              immediately  iconified by you. Window managers may choose not to
7075              honor the application's request.
7076
7077       magnify (class Magnify)
7078               specifies an integral factor by which the image should  be  en‐
7079              larged.  The default is 3.  This value only affects the magnifi‐
7080              cation window which is invoked with button number  3  after  the
7081              image is displayed.
7082
7083       matteColor (class MatteColor)
7084               Specify the color of windows. It is used for the backgrounds of
7085              windows, menus, and notices. A 3D effect is  achieved  by  using
7086              highlight  and  shadow  colors  derived from this color. Default
7087              value: #697B8F.
7088
7089       name (class Name)
7090               This resource specifies the name under which resources for  the
7091              application  should  be  found. This resource is useful in shell
7092              aliases to distinguish between invocations  of  an  application,
7093              without resorting to creating links to alter the executable file
7094              name. The default is the application name.
7095
7096       pen[1-9] (class Pen[1-9])
7097               Specifies the color of the preferred font to use when  annotat‐
7098              ing  the  image  window with text. The default colors are black,
7099              blue, green, cyan, gray, red, magenta, yellow, and white.
7100
7101       printCommand (class PrintCommand)
7102               This command is executed whenever Print is issued.  In general,
7103              it  is  the command to print PostScript to your printer. Default
7104              value: lp -c -s %i.
7105
7106       sharedMemory (class SharedMemory)
7107               This resource specifies  whether  display  should  attempt  use
7108              shared  memory for pixmaps. GraphicsMagick must be compiled with
7109              shared memory support, and the display must support the  MIT-SHM
7110              extension.  Otherwise,  this resource is ignored. The default is
7111              True.
7112
7113       textFont (class textFont)
7114               Specifies the name of the preferred font to use in fixed (type‐
7115              writer style) formatted text. The default is 14 point Courier.
7116
7117       title (class Title)
7118               This resource specifies the title to be used for the image win‐
7119              dow. This information is sometimes used by a window  manager  to
7120              provide  a header identifying the window. The default is the im‐
7121              age file name.
7122
7123       undoCache (class UndoCache)
7124               Specifies, in mega-bytes, the amount of memory in the undo edit
7125              cache.   Each  time you modify the image it is saved in the undo
7126              edit cache as long as memory is available. You can  subsequently
7127              undo  one  or  more  of these transformations. The default is 16
7128              Megabytes.
7129
7130       usePixmap (class UsePixmap)
7131               Images are maintained as a XImage by default. Set this resource
7132              to  True to utilize a server Pixmap instead. This option is use‐
7133              ful if your image exceeds the dimensions of your  server  screen
7134              and  you  intend  to  pan the image. Panning is much faster with
7135              Pixmaps than with a XImage. Pixmaps are  considered  a  precious
7136              resource, use them with discretion.
7137
7138              To set the geometry of the Magnify or Pan or window, use the ge‐
7139              ometry resource.  For example, to set the Pan window geometry to
7140              256x256, use:
7141
7142                  gm display.pan.geometry: 256x256
7143

IMAGE LOADING

7145       To  select  an  image to display, choose Open of the File sub-menu from
7146       the Command widget. A file browser is displayed.  To choose a  particu‐
7147       lar  image file, move the pointer to the filename and press any button.
7148       The filename is copied to the text window. Next, press  Open  or  press
7149       the  RETURN  key.  Alternatively,  you can type the image file name di‐
7150       rectly into the text window. To descend directories, choose a directory
7151       name  and  press  the  button twice quickly. A scrollbar allows a large
7152       list of filenames to be moved through the viewing area  if  it  exceeds
7153       the size of the list area.
7154
7155       You can trim the list of file names by using shell globbing characters.
7156       For example, type *.jpg to list only files that end with .jpg.
7157
7158       To select your image from the X server screen instead of from  a  file,
7159       Choose Grab of the Open widget.
7160

VISUAL IMAGE DIRECTORY

7162       To create a Visual Image Directory, choose Visual Directory of the File
7163       sub-menu from the Command widget . A file browser is displayed. To cre‐
7164       ate  a Visual Image Directory from all the images in the current direc‐
7165       tory, press Directory or press the RETURN key.  Alternatively, you  can
7166       select a set of image names by using shell globbing characters. For ex‐
7167       ample, type *.jpg to include only files that end with .jpg. To  descend
7168       directories,  choose  a  directory  name  and  press  the  button twice
7169       quickly. A scrollbar allows a large  list  of  filenames  to  be  moved
7170       through the viewing area if it exceeds the size of the list area.
7171
7172       After  you  select  a set of files, they are turned into thumbnails and
7173       tiled onto a single image. Now move the pointer to a particular  thumb‐
7174       nail  and press button 3 and drag. Finally, select Open. The image rep‐
7175       resented by the thumbnail is displayed at its full  size.  Choose  Next
7176       from  the  File  sub-menu of the Command widget to return to the Visual
7177       Image Directory.
7178

IMAGE CUTTING

7180       Note that cut information for image window is  not  retained  for  col‐
7181       ormapped  X  server  visuals (e.g. StaticColor, StaticColor, GRAYScale,
7182       PseudoColor).  Correct cutting behavior may require a TrueColor or  Di‐
7183       rectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
7184
7185       To  begin,  press choose Cut of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7186       get. Alternatively, press F3 in the image window.
7187
7188       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7189       window.  You  are  now in cut mode. In cut mode, the Command widget has
7190       these options:
7191
7192           Help
7193           Dismiss
7194
7195
7196       To define a cut region, press button 1 and drag. The cut region is  de‐
7197       fined  by  a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as it fol‐
7198       lows the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the cut  region,  release
7199       the  button.  You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode, the Command
7200       widget has these options:
7201
7202           Cut
7203           Help
7204           Dismiss
7205
7206
7207       You can make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the  cut  rec‐
7208       tangle  corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Cut to
7209       commit your copy region. To exit without cutting the image, press  Dis‐
7210       miss.
7211

IMAGE COPYING

7213       To  begin, press choose Copy of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7214       get. Alternatively, press F4 in the image window.
7215
7216       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7217       window.  You are now in copy mode. In copy mode, the Command widget has
7218       these options:
7219
7220           Help
7221           Dismiss
7222
7223
7224       To define a copy region, press button 1 and drag. The  copy  region  is
7225       defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as it fol‐
7226       lows the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the copy region,  release
7227       the  button.  You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode, the Command
7228       widget has these options:
7229
7230           Copy
7231           Help
7232           Dismiss
7233
7234
7235       You can make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the copy  rec‐
7236       tangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Copy to
7237       commit your copy region. To exit without copying the image, press  Dis‐
7238       miss.
7239

IMAGE PASTING

7241       To begin, press choose Paste of the Edit sub-menu from the Command wid‐
7242       get. Alternatively, press F5 in the image window.
7243
7244       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7245       window.  You are now in Paste mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.
7246       In Paste mode, the Command widget has these options:
7247
7248           Operators
7249
7250           over
7251           in
7252           out
7253           atop
7254           xor
7255           plus
7256           minus
7257           add
7258           subtract
7259           difference
7260           multiply
7261           bumpmap
7262           replace
7263
7264           Help
7265           Dismiss
7266
7267
7268       Choose a composite operation from the Operators sub-menu of the Command
7269       widget.  How  each operator behaves is described below. image window is
7270       the image currently displayed on your X server and image is  the  image
7271       obtained with the File Browser widget.
7272
7273       over    The result is the union of the two image shapes, with image ob‐
7274              scuring image window in the region of overlap.
7275
7276       in      The result is simply image cut by the shape  of  image  window.
7277              None of the image data of image window is in the result.
7278
7279       out     The resulting image is image with the shape of image window cut
7280              out.
7281
7282       atop    The result is the same shape as image window,  with  image  ob‐
7283              scuring  image  window where the image shapes overlap. Note this
7284              differs from over because the portion  of  image  outside  image
7285              window's shape does not appear in the result.
7286
7287       xor      The  result is the image data from both image and image window
7288              that is outside the overlap region. The overlap region is blank.
7289
7290       plus    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output values are
7291              cropped  to  the  maximum value (no overflow). This operation is
7292              independent of the matte channels.
7293
7294       minus   The result of image - image window, with underflow  cropped  to
7295              zero.  The  matte channel is ignored (set to opaque, full cover‐
7296              age).
7297
7298       add     The result of image +  image  window,  with  overflow  wrapping
7299              around (mod MaxRGB+1).
7300
7301       subtract
7302                The  result  of  image - image window, with underflow wrapping
7303              around (mod MaxRGB+1). The add and  subtract  operators  can  be
7304              used to perform reversible transformations.
7305
7306       difference
7307                The  result  of  abs(image - image window). This is useful for
7308              comparing two very similar images.
7309
7310       multiply
7311               The result of image * image window. This is useful for the cre‐
7312              ation of drop-shadows.
7313
7314       bumpmap
7315               The result of image window shaded by window.
7316
7317       replace
7318              The  resulting  image is image window replaced with image.  Here
7319              the matte information is ignored.
7320
7321              The image compositor requires a matte, or alpha channel  in  the
7322              image  for some operations. This extra channel usually defines a
7323              mask which represents a sort of a cookie-cutter for  the  image.
7324              This  is  the  case when matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels
7325              inside the shape, zero outside, and between zero and 255 on  the
7326              boundary. If image does not have a matte channel, it is initial‐
7327              ized with 0 for any pixel matching in color  to  pixel  location
7328              (0,0), otherwise 255. See Matte Editing for a method of defining
7329              a matte channel.
7330
7331              Note that matte information for image window is not retained for
7332              colormapped  X  server  visuals  (e.g. StaticColor, StaticColor,
7333              GrayScale, PseudoColor).  Correct compositing behavior  may  re‐
7334              quire a TrueColor or DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
7335
7336              Choosing  a composite operator is optional. The default operator
7337              is replace.  However, you must choose a  location  to  composite
7338              your  image and press button 1. Press and hold the button before
7339              releasing and an outline of the image will appear  to  help  you
7340              identify your location.
7341
7342              The  actual  colors  of  the pasted image is saved. However, the
7343              color that appears in image window may be different.  For  exam‐
7344              ple,  on  a  monochrome screen image window will appear black or
7345              white even though your pasted image may have many colors. If the
7346              image  is saved to a file it is written with the correct colors.
7347              To assure the correct colors are saved in the final  image,  any
7348              PseudoClass  image is promoted to DirectClass.  To force a Pseu‐
7349              doClass image to remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7350

IMAGE CROPPING

7352       To begin, press choose Crop of the Transform submenu from  the  Command
7353       widget. Alternatively, press C in the image window.
7354
7355       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7356       window. You are now in crop mode. In crop mode, the Command widget  has
7357       these options:
7358
7359           Help
7360           Dismiss
7361
7362
7363       To  define a cropping region, press button 1 and drag. The cropping re‐
7364       gion is defined by a highlighted rectangle that expands or contracts as
7365       it  follows  the  pointer. Once you are satisfied with the cropping re‐
7366       gion, release the button. You are now in rectify mode. In rectify mode,
7367       the Command widget has these options:
7368
7369           Crop
7370           Help
7371           Dismiss
7372
7373
7374       You  can  make adjustments by moving the pointer to one of the cropping
7375       rectangle corners, pressing a button, and dragging. Finally, press Crop
7376       to  commit  your  cropping  region. To exit without cropping the image,
7377       press Dismiss.
7378

IMAGE CHOPPING

7380       An image is chopped interactively. There is no command line argument to
7381       chop an image. To begin, choose Chop of the Transform sub-menu from the
7382       Command widget. Alternatively, press [ in the Image window.
7383
7384       You are now in Chop mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.  In  Chop
7385       mode, the Command widget has these options:
7386
7387           Direction
7388
7389           horizontal
7390           vertical
7391
7392           Help
7393           Dismiss
7394
7395
7396       If  the  you choose the horizontal direction (this is the default), the
7397       area of the image between the two horizontal endpoints of the chop line
7398       is  removed.  Otherwise, the area of the image between the two vertical
7399       endpoints of the chop line is removed.
7400
7401       Select a location within the image window to begin your chop, press and
7402       hold  any button. Next, move the pointer to another location in the im‐
7403       age.  As you move a line will connect  the  initial  location  and  the
7404       pointer. When you release the button, the area within the image to chop
7405       is determined by which direction you choose from the Command widget.
7406
7407       To cancel the image chopping, move the pointer  back  to  the  starting
7408       point of the line and release the button.
7409

IMAGE ROTATION

7411       Press  the  / key to rotate the image 90 degrees or \ to rotate -90 de‐
7412       grees.  To interactively choose the  degree  of  rotation,  choose  Ro‐
7413       tate...   of  the  Transform submenu from the Command Widget.  Alterna‐
7414       tively, press * in the image window.
7415
7416       A small horizontal line is drawn next to the pointer. You  are  now  in
7417       rotate  mode.  To  exit immediately, press Dismiss. In rotate mode, the
7418       Command widget has these options:
7419
7420           Pixel Color
7421
7422           black
7423           blue
7424           cyan
7425           green
7426           gray
7427           red
7428           magenta
7429           yellow
7430           white
7431           Browser...
7432
7433           Direction
7434
7435           horizontal
7436           vertical
7437
7438           Help
7439           Dismiss
7440
7441
7442       Choose a background color from the  Pixel  Color  sub-menu.  Additional
7443       background  colors  can  be  specified  with the color browser. You can
7444       change the menu colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7445
7446       If you choose the color browser and press  Grab,  you  can  select  the
7447       background  color  by  moving  the  pointer to the desired color on the
7448       screen and press any button.
7449
7450       Choose a point in the image window and  press  this  button  and  hold.
7451       Next,  move the pointer to another location in the image. As you move a
7452       line connects the initial location and the pointer.  When  you  release
7453       the  button, the degree of image rotation is determined by the slope of
7454       the line you just drew. The slope is  relative  to  the  direction  you
7455       choose from the Direction sub-menu of the Command widget.
7456
7457       To  cancel  the  image  rotation, move the pointer back to the starting
7458       point of the line and release the button.
7459

IMAGE ANNOTATION

7461       An image is annotated interactively. There is no command line  argument
7462       to  annotate an image. To begin, choose Annotate of the Image Edit sub-
7463       menu from the Command widget. Alternatively, press a in the image  win‐
7464       dow.
7465
7466       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7467       window. You are now in annotate mode. To exit immediately,  press  Dis‐
7468       miss.  In annotate mode, the Command widget has these options:
7469
7470
7471       Font Name
7472
7473
7474       fixed
7475
7476       variable
7477
7478       5x8
7479
7480       6x10
7481
7482       7x13bold
7483
7484       8x13bold
7485
7486       9x15bold
7487
7488       10x20
7489
7490       12x24
7491
7492       Browser...
7493
7494
7495       Font Color
7496
7497
7498       black
7499
7500       blue
7501
7502       cyan
7503
7504       green
7505
7506       gray
7507
7508       red
7509
7510       magenta
7511
7512       yellow
7513
7514       white
7515
7516       transparent
7517
7518       Browser...
7519
7520
7521       Box Color
7522
7523
7524       black
7525
7526       blue
7527
7528       cyan
7529
7530       green
7531
7532       gray
7533
7534       red
7535
7536       magenta
7537
7538       yellow
7539
7540       white
7541
7542       transparent
7543
7544       Browser...
7545
7546
7547       Rotate Text
7548
7549
7550       -90
7551
7552       -45
7553
7554       -30
7555
7556       0
7557
7558       30
7559
7560       45
7561
7562       90
7563
7564       180
7565
7566       Dialog...
7567
7568
7569       Help
7570
7571       Dismiss
7572
7573
7574       Choose  a  font name from the Font Name sub-menu. Additional font names
7575       can be specified with the font browser. You can change the  menu  names
7576       by setting the X resources font1 through font9.
7577
7578       Choose  a font color from the Font Color sub-menu. Additional font col‐
7579       ors can be specified with the color browser. You can  change  the  menu
7580       colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7581
7582       If you select the color browser and press Grab, you can choose the font
7583       color by moving the pointer to the desired  color  on  the  screen  and
7584       press any button.
7585
7586       If  you choose to rotate the text, choose Rotate Text from the menu and
7587       select an angle. Typically you will only want to  rotate  one  line  of
7588       text at a time. Depending on the angle you choose, subsequent lines may
7589       end up overwriting each other.
7590
7591       Choosing a font and its color is optional. The default  font  is  fixed
7592       and  the default color is black. However, you must choose a location to
7593       begin entering text and press a button. An  underscore  character  will
7594       appear  at  the location of the pointer. The cursor changes to a pencil
7595       to indicate you are in text mode. To exit immediately, press Dismiss.
7596
7597       In text mode, any key presses will display the character at  the  loca‐
7598       tion  of  the  underscore and advance the underscore cursor. Enter your
7599       text and once completed press Apply to finish your image annotation. To
7600       correct  errors  press  BACK  SPACE.  To delete an entire line of text,
7601       press DELETE.  Any text that exceeds the boundaries of the image window
7602       is automatically continued onto the next line.
7603
7604       The  actual  color you request for the font is saved in the image. How‐
7605       ever, the color that appears in your Image window may be different. For
7606       example,  on  a  monochrome  screen the text will appear black or white
7607       even if you choose the color red as the font color. However, the  image
7608       saved  to  a  file with -write is written with red lettering. To assure
7609       the correct color text in the final image,  any  PseudoClass  image  is
7610       promoted  to DirectClass (see miff(5)). To force a PseudoClass image to
7611       remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7612

IMAGE COMPOSITING

7614       An image composite is created interactively. There is no  command  line
7615       argument to composite an image. To begin, choose Composite of the Image
7616       Edit from the Command widget. Alternatively, press x in the Image  win‐
7617       dow.
7618
7619       First  a  popup  window  is  displayed requesting you to enter an image
7620       name.  Press Composite, Grab or type a file name. Press Cancel  if  you
7621       choose  not to create a composite image. When you choose Grab, move the
7622       pointer to the desired window and press any button.
7623
7624       If the Composite image does not have any matte information, you are in‐
7625       formed  and  the  file  browser is displayed again. Enter the name of a
7626       mask image. The image is typically grayscale and the same size  as  the
7627       composite  image.  If  the  image  is not grayscale, it is converted to
7628       grayscale and the resulting intensities are used as matte information.
7629
7630       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7631       window.  You are now in composite mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7632       miss.  In composite mode, the Command widget has these options:
7633
7634
7635       Operators
7636
7637
7638       over
7639
7640       in
7641
7642       out
7643
7644       atop
7645
7646       xor
7647
7648       plus
7649
7650       minus
7651
7652       add
7653
7654       subtract
7655
7656       difference
7657
7658       bumpmap
7659
7660       replace
7661
7662
7663       Blend
7664
7665       Displace
7666
7667       Help
7668
7669       Dismiss
7670
7671
7672       Choose a composite operation from the Operators sub-menu of the Command
7673       widget.  How  each operator behaves is described below. image window is
7674       the image currently displayed on your X server and image is  the  image
7675       obtained
7676
7677       over    The result is the union of the two image shapes, with image ob‐
7678              scuring image window in the region of overlap.
7679
7680       in      The result is simply image cut by the shape  of  image  window.
7681              None of the image data of image window is in the result.
7682
7683       out     The resulting image is image with the shape of image window cut
7684              out.
7685
7686       atop    The result is the same shape as image window,  with  image  ob‐
7687              scuring  image  window where the image shapes overlap. Note this
7688              differs from over because the portion  of  image  outside  image
7689              window's shape does not appear in the result.
7690
7691       xor      The  result is the image data from both image and image window
7692              that is outside the overlap region. The overlap region is blank.
7693
7694       plus    The result is just the sum of the image data. Output values are
7695              cropped  to  255 (no overflow). This operation is independent of
7696              the matte channels.
7697
7698       minus   The result of image - image window, with underflow  cropped  to
7699              zero. The matte channel is ignored (set to 255, full coverage).
7700
7701       add      The  result  of  image  + image window, with overflow wrapping
7702              around (mod 256).
7703
7704       subtract
7705               The result of image - image  window,  with  underflow  wrapping
7706              around  (mod 256). The add and subtract operators can be used to
7707              perform reversible transformations.
7708
7709       difference
7710               The result of abs(image - image window).  This  is  useful  for
7711              comparing two very similar images.
7712
7713       bumpmap
7714               The result of image window shaded by window.
7715
7716       replace
7717                The resulting image is image window replaced with image.  Here
7718              the matte information is ignored.
7719
7720              The image compositor requires a matte, or alpha channel  in  the
7721              image  for some operations. This extra channel usually defines a
7722              mask which represents a sort of a cookie-cutter for  the  image.
7723              This  is  the  case when matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels
7724              inside the shape, zero outside, and between zero and 255 on  the
7725              boundary. If image does not have a matte channel, it is initial‐
7726              ized with 0 for any pixel matching in color  to  pixel  location
7727              (0,0), otherwise 255. See Matte Editing for a method of defining
7728              a matte channel.
7729
7730              If you choose blend, the composite operator becomes  over.   The
7731              image  matte channel percent transparency is initialized to fac‐
7732              tor.  The image window is  initialized  to  (100-factor).  Where
7733              factor is the value you specify in the Dialog widget.
7734
7735              Displace  shifts  the  image pixels as defined by a displacement
7736              map.  With this option, image is used  as  a  displacement  map.
7737              Black,  within  the displacement map, is a maximum positive dis‐
7738              placement. White is a maximum negative displacement  and  middle
7739              gray  is  neutral.  The  displacement is scaled to determine the
7740              pixel shift. By default, the displacement applies  in  both  the
7741              horizontal  and  vertical  directions.  However,  if you specify
7742              mask, image is the horizontal X displacement and mask the verti‐
7743              cal Y displacement.
7744
7745              Note that matte information for image window is not retained for
7746              colormapped X server visuals  (e.g.   StaticColor,  StaticColor,
7747              GrayScale,  PseudoColor).   Correct compositing behavior may re‐
7748              quire a TrueColor or DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
7749
7750              Choosing a composite operator is optional. The default  operator
7751              is  replace.   However,  you must choose a location to composite
7752              your image and press button 1. Press and hold the button  before
7753              releasing  and  an  outline of the image will appear to help you
7754              identify your location.
7755
7756              The actual colors of the composite image is saved. However,  the
7757              color  that  appears in image window may be different. For exam‐
7758              ple, on a monochrome screen Image window will  appear  black  or
7759              white even though your composited image may have many colors. If
7760              the image is saved to a file it is written with the correct col‐
7761              ors.  To assure the correct colors are saved in the final image,
7762              any PseudoClass image is promoted to DirectClass (see miff).  To
7763              force a PseudoClass image to remain PseudoClass, use -colors.
7764

COLOR EDITING

7766       Changing  the  the color of a set of pixels is performed interactively.
7767       There is no command line argument to edit a  pixel.  To  begin,  choose
7768       Color  from  the  Image  Edit  submenu of the Command widget.  Alterna‐
7769       tively, press c in the image window.
7770
7771       A small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the  image
7772       window. You are now in color edit mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7773       miss.  In color edit mode, the Command widget has these options:
7774
7775
7776       Method
7777
7778
7779       point
7780
7781       replace
7782
7783       floodfill
7784
7785       reset
7786
7787
7788       Pixel Color
7789
7790
7791       black
7792
7793       blue
7794
7795       cyan
7796
7797       green
7798
7799       gray
7800
7801       red
7802
7803       magenta
7804
7805       yellow
7806
7807       white
7808
7809       Browser...
7810
7811
7812       Border Color
7813
7814
7815       black
7816
7817       blue
7818
7819       cyan
7820
7821       green
7822
7823       gray
7824
7825       red
7826
7827       magenta
7828
7829       yellow
7830
7831       white
7832
7833       Browser...
7834
7835
7836       Fuzz
7837
7838
7839       0
7840
7841       2
7842
7843       4
7844
7845       8
7846
7847       16
7848           Dialog...
7849
7850
7851       Undo
7852
7853       Help
7854
7855       Dismiss
7856
7857
7858       Choose a color editing method from the Method sub-menu of  the  Command
7859       widget.  The  point method recolors any pixel selected with the pointer
7860       unless the button is released. The replace method  recolors  any  pixel
7861       that  matches  the  color  of the pixel you select with a button press.
7862       Floodfill recolors any pixel that matches the color of  the  pixel  you
7863       select  with  a  button  press and is a neighbor.  Whereas filltoborder
7864       changes the matte value of any neighbor pixel that is  not  the  border
7865       color.  Finally reset changes the entire image to the designated color.
7866
7867       Next,  choose  a  pixel color from the Pixel Color sub-menu. Additional
7868       pixel colors can be specified with the color browser.  You  can  change
7869       the menu colors by setting the X resources pen1 through pen9.
7870
7871       Now  press button 1 to select a pixel within the Image window to change
7872       its color. Additional pixels may be  recolored  as  prescribed  by  the
7873       method you choose. additional pixels by increasing the Delta value.
7874
7875       If  the Magnify widget is mapped, it can be helpful in positioning your
7876       pointer within the image (refer to button 2). Alternatively you can se‐
7877       lect  a  pixel  to  recolor  from  within  the Magnify widget. Move the
7878       pointer to the Magnify widget and position the pixel  with  the  cursor
7879       control keys. Finally, press a button to recolor the selected pixel (or
7880       pixels).
7881
7882       The actual color you request for the pixels is saved in the image. How‐
7883       ever, the color that appears in your Image window may be different. For
7884       example, on a monochrome screen the pixel will appear  black  or  white
7885       even if you choose the color red as the pixel color. However, the image
7886       saved to a file with -write is written with red pixels. To  assure  the
7887       correct  color  text  in the final image, any PseudoClass image is pro‐
7888       moted to DirectClass To force a PseudoClass  image  to  remain  Pseudo‐
7889       Class, use -colors.
7890

MATTE EDITING

7892       Matte information within an image is useful for some operations such as
7893       image compositing. This extra channel usually defines a mask which rep‐
7894       resents  a sort of a cookie-cutter for the image. This is the case when
7895       matte is 255 (full coverage) for pixels inside the shape, zero outside,
7896       and between zero and 255 on the boundary.
7897
7898       Setting  the matte information in an image is done interactively. There
7899       is no command line argument to edit a pixel. To begin, and choose Matte
7900       of the Image Edit sub-menu from the Command widget.
7901
7902       Alternatively, press m in the image window.
7903
7904       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
7905       window. You are now in matte edit mode. To exit immediately, press Dis‐
7906       miss.  In matte edit mode, the Command widget has these options:
7907
7908
7909       Method
7910
7911
7912       point
7913
7914       replace
7915
7916       floodfill
7917
7918       reset
7919
7920
7921       Border Color
7922
7923
7924       black
7925
7926       blue
7927
7928       cyan
7929
7930       green
7931
7932       gray
7933
7934       red
7935
7936       magenta
7937
7938       yellow
7939
7940       white
7941
7942       Browser...
7943
7944
7945       Fuzz
7946
7947
7948       0
7949
7950       2
7951
7952       4
7953
7954       8
7955
7956       16
7957           Dialog...
7958
7959
7960       Matte
7961
7962       Undo
7963
7964       Help
7965
7966       Dismiss
7967
7968       Choose  a  matte editing method from the Method sub-menu of the Command
7969       widget. The point method changes the matte value of the any  pixel  se‐
7970       lected  with  the  pointer  until  the  button is released. The replace
7971       method changes the matte value of any pixel that matches the  color  of
7972       the  pixel  you select with a button press. Floodfill changes the matte
7973       value of any pixel that matches the color of the pixel you select  with
7974       a  button  press  and  is a neighbor. Whereas filltoborder recolors any
7975       neighbor pixel that is not the border color. Finally reset changes  the
7976       entire  image  to the designated matte value.  Choose Matte Value and a
7977       dialog appears requesting a matte value.  Enter a value between  0  and
7978       255. This value is assigned as the matte value of the selected pixel or
7979       pixels.  Now, press any button to select a pixel within the Image  win‐
7980       dow  to change its matte value. You can change the matte value of addi‐
7981       tional pixels by increasing the Delta value. The Delta value  is  first
7982       added  then  subtracted  from  the  red,  green, and blue of the target
7983       color. Any pixels within the range also have their matte value updated.
7984       If  the Magnify widget is mapped, it can be helpful in positioning your
7985       pointer within the image (refer to button 2). Alternatively you can se‐
7986       lect  a pixel to change the matte value from within the Magnify widget.
7987       Move the pointer to the Magnify widget and position the pixel with  the
7988       cursor  control keys. Finally, press a button to change the matte value
7989       of the selected pixel (or pixels).  Matte information is only valid  in
7990       a  DirectClass  image.  Therefore, any PseudoClass image is promoted to
7991       DirectClass. Note that matte information for  PseudoClass  is  not  re‐
7992       tained for colormapped X server visuals (e.g. StaticColor, StaticColor,
7993       GrayScale, PseudoColor) unless you immediately save  your  image  to  a
7994       file  (refer  to  Write).  Correct matte editing behavior may require a
7995       TrueColor or DirectColor visual or a Standard Colormap.
7996

IMAGE DRAWING

7998       An image is drawn upon interactively. There is no command line argument
7999       to  draw  on an image. To begin, choose Draw of the Image Edit sub-menu
8000       from the Command widget.  Alternatively, press d in the image window.
8001
8002       The cursor changes to a crosshair to indicate you are in draw mode.  To
8003       exit  immediately,  press Dismiss. In draw mode, the Command widget has
8004       these options:
8005
8006
8007       Primitive
8008
8009
8010       point
8011
8012       line
8013
8014       rectangle
8015
8016       fill rectangle
8017
8018       circle
8019
8020       fill circle
8021
8022       ellipse
8023
8024       fill ellipse
8025
8026       polygon
8027
8028       fill polygon
8029
8030
8031       Color
8032
8033
8034       black
8035
8036       blue
8037
8038       cyan
8039
8040       green
8041
8042       gray
8043
8044       red
8045
8046       magenta
8047
8048       yellow
8049
8050       white
8051
8052       transparent
8053
8054       Browser...
8055
8056
8057       Stipple
8058
8059
8060       Brick
8061
8062       Diagonal
8063
8064       Scales
8065
8066       Vertical
8067
8068       Wavy
8069
8070       Translucent
8071
8072       Opaque
8073
8074       Open...
8075
8076
8077       Width
8078
8079
8080       1
8081
8082       2
8083
8084       4
8085
8086       8
8087
8088       16
8089           Dialog...
8090
8091
8092       Undo
8093
8094       Help
8095
8096       Dismiss
8097
8098       Choose a drawing primitive from the Primitive sub-menu.
8099
8100       Next, choose a color from the Color sub-menu. Additional colors can  be
8101       specified  with  the  color  browser. You can change the menu colors by
8102       setting the X resources pen1 through pen9. The  transparent  color  up‐
8103       dates the image matte channel and is useful for image compositing.
8104
8105       If  you  choose  the  color  browser and press Grab, you can select the
8106       primitive color by moving the pointer  to  the  desired  color  on  the
8107       screen  and  press  any button. The transparent color updates the image
8108       matte channel and is useful for image compositing.
8109
8110       Choose a stipple, if appropriate, from the Stipple sub-menu. Additional
8111       stipples can be specified with the file browser. Stipples obtained from
8112       the file browser must be on disk in the X11 bitmap format.
8113
8114       Choose a line width, if appropriate, from the Width sub-menu. To choose
8115       a specific width select the Dialog widget.
8116
8117       Choose  a  point in the image window and press button 1 and hold. Next,
8118       move the pointer to another location in the image. As you move, a  line
8119       connects  the  initial  location  and the pointer. When you release the
8120       button, the image is updated with the  primitive  you  just  drew.  For
8121       polygons,  the  image  is updated when you press and release the button
8122       without moving the pointer.
8123
8124       To cancel image drawing, move the pointer back to the starting point of
8125       the line and release the button.
8126

REGION OF INTEREST

8128       To  begin,  press choose Region of Interest of the Pixel Transform sub-
8129       menu from the Command widget.  Alternatively, press R in the image win‐
8130       dow.
8131
8132       A  small window appears showing the location of the cursor in the image
8133       window. You are now in region of interest mode. In region  of  interest
8134       mode, the Command widget has these options:
8135
8136
8137       Help
8138
8139       Dismiss
8140
8141
8142       To  define a region of interest, press button 1 and drag. The region of
8143       interest is defined by a highlighted rectangle  that  expands  or  con‐
8144       tracts  as  it follows the pointer. Once you are satisfied with the re‐
8145       gion of interest, release the button. You are now in apply mode. In ap‐
8146       ply mode the Command widget has these options:
8147
8148
8149       File
8150
8151
8152       Save...
8153
8154       Print...
8155
8156
8157       Edit
8158
8159
8160       Undo
8161
8162       Redo
8163
8164
8165       Transform
8166
8167
8168       Flip
8169
8170       Flop
8171
8172       Rotate Right
8173
8174       Rotate Left
8175
8176
8177       Enhance
8178
8179
8180       Hue...
8181
8182       Saturation...
8183
8184       Brightness...
8185
8186       Gamma...
8187
8188       Spiff
8189
8190       Dull
8191
8192       Equalize
8193
8194       Normalize
8195
8196       Negate
8197
8198       GRAYscale
8199
8200       Quantize...
8201
8202
8203       Effects
8204
8205
8206       Despeckle
8207
8208       Emboss
8209
8210       Reduce Noise
8211
8212       Add Noise
8213
8214       Sharpen...
8215
8216       Blur...
8217
8218       Threshold...
8219
8220       Edge Detect...
8221
8222       Spread...
8223
8224       Shade...
8225
8226       Raise...
8227
8228       Segment...
8229
8230
8231
8232
8233       F/X
8234
8235
8236       Solarize...
8237
8238       Swirl...
8239
8240       Implode...
8241
8242       Wave...
8243
8244       Oil Paint
8245
8246       Charcoal Draw...
8247
8248
8249
8250
8251       Miscellany
8252
8253
8254       Image Info
8255
8256       Zoom Image
8257
8258       Show Preview...
8259
8260       Show Histogram
8261
8262       Show Matte
8263
8264
8265       Help
8266
8267       Dismiss
8268
8269
8270       You  can  make  adjustments  to  the  region  of interest by moving the
8271       pointer to one of the rectangle corners, pressing a button,  and  drag‐
8272       ging.  Finally,  choose  an image processing technique from the Command
8273       widget. You can choose more than one image processing technique to  ap‐
8274       ply  to an area. Alternatively, you can move the region of interest be‐
8275       fore applying another image processing technique. To exit,  press  Dis‐
8276       miss.
8277

IMAGE PANNING

8279       When  an image exceeds the width or height of the X server screen, dis‐
8280       play maps a small panning icon. The rectangle within the  panning  icon
8281       shows  the area that is currently displayed in the the image window. To
8282       pan about the image, press any button and drag the pointer  within  the
8283       panning  icon.   The pan rectangle moves with the pointer and the image
8284       window is updated to reflect the location of the rectangle  within  the
8285       panning  icon. When you have selected the area of the image you wish to
8286       view, release the button.
8287
8288       Use the arrow keys to pan the image one pixel up, down, left, or  right
8289       within the image window.
8290
8291       The panning icon is withdrawn if the image becomes smaller than the di‐
8292       mensions of the X server screen.
8293

USER PREFERENCES

8295       Preferences affect the default behavior of display(1). The  preferences
8296       are either true or false and are stored in your home directory as .dis‐
8297       playrc:
8298
8299                display image centered on a backdrop"
8300
8301
8302                    This backdrop covers the entire workstation screen and  is
8303                    useful  for  hiding  other X window activity while viewing
8304                    the image. The color of the backdrop is specified  as  the
8305                    background color. Refer to X Resources for details.
8306                confirm on program exit"
8307
8308
8309                    Ask  for a confirmation before exiting the display(1) pro‐
8310                    gram.
8311                correct image for display gamma"
8312
8313
8314                    If the image has a known gamma, the gamma is corrected  to
8315                    match  that  of  the  X  server  (see  the X Resource dis‐
8316                    playGamma).
8317                display warning messages"
8318
8319
8320                    Display any warning messages.
8321                apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to image"
8322
8323
8324                    The basic strategy of dithering is to trade intensity res‐
8325                    olution  for  spatial resolution by averaging the intensi‐
8326                    ties of several neighboring pixels.  Images  which  suffer
8327                    from  severe  contouring  when  reducing colors can be im‐
8328                    proved with this preference.
8329                use a shared colormap for colormapped X visuals"
8330
8331
8332                    This option only applies when the default X server  visual
8333                    is PseudoColor or GRAYScale. Refer to -visual for more de‐
8334                    tails. By default, a shared colormap is allocated. The im‐
8335                    age shares colors with other X clients.  Some image colors
8336                    could be approximated, therefore your image may look  very
8337                    different than intended. Otherwise the image colors appear
8338                    exactly as they are defined. However, other clients may go
8339                    technicolor when the image colormap is installed.
8340                display images as an X server pixmap"
8341
8342
8343                    Images are maintained as a XImage by default. Set this re‐
8344                    source to True to utilize a server  Pixmap  instead.  This
8345                    option  is  useful if your image exceeds the dimensions of
8346                    your server screen and you intend to pan the  image.  Pan‐
8347                    ning  is  much  faster  with  Pixmaps  than with a XImage.
8348                    Pixmaps are considered a precious resource, use them  with
8349                    discretion.
8350
8351
8352
8353       GM IDENTIFY
8354
8355              Identify describes the format and characteristics of one or more
8356              image files as internally supported by  the  software.  It  will
8357              also  report if an image is incomplete or corrupt.  The informa‐
8358              tion displayed includes the scene number,  the  file  name,  the
8359              width  and height of the image, whether the image is colormapped
8360              or not, the number of colors in the image, the number  of  bytes
8361              in the image, the format of the image (JPEG, PNM, etc.), and fi‐
8362              nally the number of seconds in both user time and  elapsed  time
8363              it took to read and process the image.  If -verbose or +ping are
8364              provided as an option, the pixel read rate is also displayed. An
8365              example line output from identify follows:
8366
8367                  images/aquarium.miff 640x480 PseudoClass 256c
8368                         308135b MIFF 0.000u 0:01
8369
8370              If -verbose is set, expect additional output including any image
8371              comment:
8372
8373
8374                  Image: images/aquarium.miff
8375                  class: PseudoClass
8376                  colors: 256
8377                  signature: eb5dca81dd93ae7e6ffae99a527eb5dca8...
8378                  matte: False
8379                  geometry: 640x480
8380                     depth: 8
8381                  bytes: 308135
8382                  format: MIFF
8383                  comments:
8384                  Imported from MTV raster image: aquarium.mtv
8385
8386              For some formats, additional format-specific  information  about
8387              the  file  will be written if the -debug coder or -debug all op‐
8388              tion is used.
8389

IDENTIFY OPTIONS

8391       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
8392       the  command  line  remains in effect for the set of images immediately
8393       following, until the set is terminated by the appearance of any  option
8394       or -noop.
8395
8396       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8397
8398
8399       -authenticate <string>
8400              decrypt image with this password
8401
8402       -debug <events>
8403              enable debug printout
8404
8405       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8406              add coder/decoder specific options
8407
8408       -density <width>x<height>
8409              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8410
8411       -depth <value>
8412              depth of the image
8413
8414       -format <string>
8415              output formatted image characteristics
8416
8417       -help  print usage instructions
8418
8419       -interlace <type>
8420              the type of interlacing scheme
8421
8422       -limit <type> <value>
8423              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
8424              resource limit
8425
8426       -log <string>
8427              Specify format for debug log
8428
8429       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
8430
8431       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8432              chroma subsampling factors
8433
8434       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
8435              width and height of the image
8436
8437       -verbose
8438              print detailed information about the image
8439
8440       -version
8441              print GraphicsMagick version string
8442
8443              For a more detailed description of  each  option,  see  Options,
8444              above.
8445
8446

GM IMPORT

8448       Import  reads  an image from any visible window on an X server and out‐
8449       puts it as an image file. You can capture a single window,  the  entire
8450       screen,  or any rectangular portion of the screen.  Use display for re‐
8451       display, printing, editing, formatting,  archiving,  image  processing,
8452       etc. of the captured image.
8453
8454       The  target  window can be specified by id, name, or may be selected by
8455       clicking the mouse in the desired window. If you  press  a  button  and
8456       then  drag,  a  rectangle  will form which expands and contracts as the
8457       mouse moves. To save the portion of the screen defined by  the  rectan‐
8458       gle, just release the button. The keyboard bell is rung once at the be‐
8459       ginning of the screen capture and twice when it completes.
8460

EXAMPLES

8462       To select an X window or an area of the screen with the mouse and  save
8463       it in the MIFF image format to a file entitled window.miff, use:
8464
8465           gm import window.miff
8466
8467       To  select an X window or an area of the screen with the mouse and save
8468       it in the Encapsulated PostScript format to include  in  another  docu‐
8469       ment, use:
8470
8471           gm import figure.eps
8472
8473       To  capture  the  entire  X server screen in the JPEG image format in a
8474       file entitled root.jpeg, without using the mouse, use:
8475
8476           gm import -window root root.jpeg
8477
8478       To capture the 512x256 area at the upper right corner of the  X  server
8479       screen  in the PNG image format in a well-compressed file entitled cor‐
8480       ner.png, without using the mouse,  use:
8481
8482           gm import -window root -crop 512x256-0+0 -quality 90
8483                  corner.png
8484

OPTIONS

8486       Options are processed in command line order. Any option you specify  on
8487       the  command  line  remains in effect until it is explicitly changed by
8488       specifying the option again with a different effect.
8489
8490       Import options can appear on the command line or in  your  X  resources
8491       file.  See X(1). Options on the command line supersede values specified
8492       in your X resources file.
8493
8494       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8495
8496
8497       -bordercolor <color>
8498              the border color
8499
8500       -colors <value>
8501              preferred number of colors in the image
8502
8503       -colorspace <value>
8504              the type of colorspace
8505
8506       -comment <string>
8507              annotate an image with a comment
8508
8509       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
8510              preferred size and location of the cropped image
8511
8512       -debug <events>
8513              enable debug printout
8514
8515       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8516              add coder/decoder specific options
8517
8518       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
8519              display the next image after pausing
8520
8521       -density <width>x<height>
8522              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8523
8524       -depth <value>
8525              depth of the image
8526
8527       -descend
8528              obtain image by descending window hierarchy
8529
8530       -display <host:display[.screen]>
8531              specifies the X server to contact
8532
8533       -dispose <method>
8534              GIF disposal method
8535
8536       -dither
8537              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
8538
8539       -encoding <type>
8540              specify the text encoding
8541
8542       -endian <type>
8543              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
8544
8545       -frame include the X window frame in the imported image
8546
8547       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
8548              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
8549
8550       -help  print usage instructions
8551
8552       -interlace <type>
8553              the type of interlacing scheme
8554
8555       -label <name>
8556              assign a label to an image
8557
8558       -limit <type> <value>
8559              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
8560              resource limit
8561
8562       -log <string>
8563              Specify format for debug log
8564
8565       -monitor
8566              show progress indication
8567
8568       -monochrome
8569              transform the image to black and white
8570
8571       -negate
8572              replace every pixel with its complementary color
8573
8574       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
8575              size and location of an image canvas
8576
8577       -pause <seconds>
8578              pause between snapshots [import]
8579
8580       -ping  efficiently determine image characteristics
8581
8582       -pointsize <value>
8583              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
8584
8585       -quality <value>
8586              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
8587
8588       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8589              resize an image
8590
8591       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
8592              rotate the image
8593
8594       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8595              chroma subsampling factors
8596
8597       -scene <value>
8598              set scene number
8599
8600       -screen
8601              specify the screen to capture
8602
8603       -set <attribute> <value>
8604              set an image attribute
8605
8606       +set <attribute>
8607              unset an image attribute
8608
8609       -silent
8610              operate silently
8611
8612       -snaps <value>
8613              number of screen snapshots
8614
8615       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8616              resize an image (quickly)
8617
8618       -transparent <color>
8619              make this color transparent within the image
8620
8621       -trim  trim an image
8622
8623       -verbose
8624              print detailed information about the image
8625
8626       -version
8627              print GraphicsMagick version string
8628
8629              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
8630              above.
8631
8632

GM MOGRIFY

8634       Mogrify transforms an image or a sequence of images.  These  transforms
8635       include  image  scaling,  image  rotation, color reduction, and others.
8636       Each transmogrified image overwrites the corresponding original  image,
8637       unless  an option such as -format causes the output filename to be dif‐
8638       ferent from the input filename.
8639
8640       The graphics formats supported by mogrify are  listed  in  GraphicsMag‐
8641       ick(1).
8642

EXAMPLES

8644       To convert all the TIFF files in a particular directory to JPEG, use:
8645
8646           gm mogrify -format jpeg *.tiff
8647
8648       To convert a directory full of JPEG images to thumbnails, use:
8649
8650           gm mogrify -size 120x120 *.jpg -resize 120x120 +profile "*"
8651
8652       In  this example, '-size 120x120' gives a hint to the JPEG decoder that
8653       the images are going to be downscaled to 120x120, allowing  it  to  run
8654       faster  by  avoiding returning full-resolution images to GraphicsMagick
8655       for the subsequent resizing operation.  The ´-resize 120x120' specifies
8656       the  desired dimensions of the output images.  It will be scaled so its
8657       largest dimension is 120 pixels.  The ´+profile "*"' removes  any  ICM,
8658       EXIF,  IPTC,  or  other profiles that might be present in the input and
8659       aren't needed in the thumbnails.
8660
8661       To scale an image of a cockatoo to exactly 640 pixels in width and  480
8662       pixels in height, use:
8663
8664           gm mogrify -resize 640x480! cockatoo.miff
8665

OPTIONS

8667       Options  are processed in command line order. Any option you specify on
8668       the command line remains in effect for the set of images that  follows,
8669       until the set is terminated by the appearance of any option or -noop.
8670
8671       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
8672
8673
8674       -affine <matrix>
8675              drawing transform matrix
8676
8677       -antialias
8678              remove pixel aliasing
8679
8680       -asc-cdl <spec>
8681              apply ASC CDL color transform
8682
8683       -authenticate <string>
8684              decrypt image with this password
8685
8686       -auto-orient
8687              orient (rotate) image so it is upright
8688
8689       -background <color>
8690              the background color
8691
8692       -black-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
8693              pixels below the threshold become black
8694
8695       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
8696              blue chromaticity primary point
8697
8698       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
8699              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
8700
8701       -border <width>x<height>
8702              surround the image with a border of color
8703
8704       -bordercolor <color>
8705              the border color
8706
8707       -channel <type>
8708              the type of channel
8709
8710       -charcoal <factor>
8711              simulate a charcoal drawing
8712
8713       -colorize <value>
8714              colorize the image with the pen color
8715
8716       -colors <value>
8717              preferred number of colors in the image
8718
8719       -colorspace <value>
8720              the type of colorspace
8721
8722       -comment <string>
8723              annotate an image with a comment
8724
8725       -compose <operator>
8726              the type of image composition
8727
8728       -compress <type>
8729              the type of image compression
8730
8731       -contrast
8732              enhance or reduce the image contrast
8733
8734       -convolve <kernel>
8735              convolve image with the specified convolution kernel
8736
8737       -create-directories
8738              create output directory if required
8739
8740       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
8741              preferred size and location of the cropped image
8742
8743       -cycle <amount>
8744              displace image colormap by amount
8745
8746       -debug <events>
8747              enable debug printout
8748
8749       -define <key>{=<value>},...
8750              add coder/decoder specific options
8751
8752       -delay <1/100ths of a second>
8753              display the next image after pausing
8754
8755       -density <width>x<height>
8756              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
8757
8758       -depth <value>
8759              depth of the image
8760
8761       -despeckle
8762              reduce the speckles within an image
8763
8764       -display <host:display[.screen]>
8765              specifies the X server to contact
8766
8767       -dispose <method>
8768              GIF disposal method
8769
8770       -dither
8771              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
8772
8773       -draw <string>
8774              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
8775
8776       -edge <radius>
8777              detect edges within an image
8778
8779       -emboss <radius>
8780              emboss an image
8781
8782       -encoding <type>
8783              specify the text encoding
8784
8785       -endian <type>
8786              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
8787
8788       -enhance
8789              apply a digital filter to enhance a noisy image
8790
8791       -equalize
8792              perform histogram equalization to the image
8793
8794       -extent <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
8795              composite image on background color canvas image
8796
8797       -fill <color>
8798              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
8799
8800       -filter <type>
8801              use this type of filter when resizing an image
8802
8803       -flip  create a "mirror image"
8804
8805       -flop  create a "mirror image"
8806
8807       -font <name>
8808              use this font when annotating the image with text
8809
8810       -format <type>
8811              the image format type
8812
8813       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
8814              surround the image with an ornamental border
8815
8816       -fuzz <distance>{%}
8817              colors within this Euclidean distance are considered equal
8818
8819       -gamma <value>
8820              level of gamma correction
8821
8822       -gaussian <radius>{x<sigma>}
8823              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
8824
8825       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
8826              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
8827
8828       -gravity <type>
8829              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
8830
8831       -green-primary <x>,<y>
8832              green chromaticity primary point
8833
8834       -hald-clut <clut>
8835              apply a Hald CLUT to the image
8836
8837       -help  print usage instructions
8838
8839       -implode <factor>
8840              implode image pixels about the center
8841
8842       -interlace <type>
8843              the type of interlacing scheme
8844
8845       -label <name>
8846              assign a label to an image
8847
8848       -lat <width>x<height>{+-}<offset>{%}
8849              perform local adaptive thresholding
8850
8851       -level <black_point>{,<gamma>}{,<white_point>}{%}
8852              adjust the level of image contrast
8853
8854       -limit <type> <value>
8855              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
8856              resource limit
8857
8858       -linewidth
8859              the line width for subsequent draw operations
8860
8861       -list <type>
8862              the type of list
8863
8864       -log <string>
8865              Specify format for debug log
8866
8867       -loop <iterations>
8868              add Netscape loop extension to your GIF animation
8869
8870       -magnify
8871              magnify the image
8872
8873       -map <filename>
8874              choose a particular set of colors from this image
8875
8876       -mask <filename>
8877              Specify a clipping mask
8878
8879       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
8880
8881       -mattecolor <color>
8882              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
8883
8884       -median <radius>
8885              apply a median filter to the image
8886
8887       -minify <factor>
8888              minify the image
8889
8890       -modulate brightness[,saturation[,hue]]
8891              vary the brightness, saturation, and hue of an image
8892
8893       -monitor
8894              show progress indication
8895
8896       -monochrome
8897              transform the image to black and white
8898
8899       -motion-blur <radius>{x<sigma>}{+angle}
8900              Simulate motion blur
8901
8902       -negate
8903              replace every pixel with its complementary color
8904
8905       -noise <radius|type>
8906              add or reduce noise in an image
8907
8908       -noop  NOOP (no option)
8909
8910       -normalize
8911              transform image to span the full range of color values
8912
8913       -opaque <color>
8914              change this color to the pen color within the image
8915
8916       -operator channel operator rvalue[%]
8917              apply a mathematical, bitwise, or value  operator  to  an  image
8918              channel
8919
8920       -ordered-dither <channeltype> <NxN>
8921              ordered dither the image
8922
8923       -output-directory <directory>
8924              output files to directory
8925
8926       -orient <orientation>
8927              Set the image orientation attribute
8928
8929       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
8930              size and location of an image canvas
8931
8932       -paint <radius>
8933              simulate an oil painting
8934
8935       -pen <color>
8936              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
8937
8938       -pointsize <value>
8939              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
8940
8941       -profile <filename>
8942              add ICM, IPTC, or generic profile  to image
8943
8944       -preserve-timestamp
8945              preserve the original timestamps of the file
8946
8947       -quality <value>
8948              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
8949
8950       -raise <width>x<height>
8951              lighten or darken image edges
8952
8953       -random-threshold <channeltype> <LOWxHIGH>
8954              random threshold the image
8955
8956       -recolor <matrix>
8957              apply a color translation matrix to image channels
8958
8959       -red-primary <x>,<y>
8960              red chromaticity primary point
8961
8962       -region <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>
8963              apply options to a portion of the image
8964
8965       -render
8966              render vector operations
8967
8968       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
8969              Adjust image page offsets
8970
8971       -resample <horizontal>x<vertical>
8972              Resample image to specified horizontal and vertical resolution
8973
8974       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
8975              resize an image
8976
8977       -roll {+-}<x>{+-}<y>
8978              roll an image vertically or horizontally
8979
8980       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
8981              rotate the image
8982
8983       -sample <geometry>
8984              scale image using pixel sampling
8985
8986       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
8987              chroma subsampling factors
8988
8989       -scale <geometry>
8990              scale the image.
8991
8992       -scene <value>
8993              set scene number
8994
8995       -set <attribute> <value>
8996              set an image attribute
8997
8998       +set <attribute>
8999              unset an image attribute
9000
9001       -segment <cluster threshold>x<smoothing threshold>
9002              segment an image
9003
9004       -shade <azimuth>x<elevation>
9005              shade the image using a distant light source
9006
9007       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
9008              sharpen the image
9009
9010       -shave <width>x<height>{%}
9011              shave pixels from the image edges
9012
9013       -shear <x degrees>x<y degrees>
9014              shear the image along the X or Y axis
9015
9016       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
9017              width and height of the image
9018
9019       -solarize <factor>
9020              negate all pixels above the threshold level
9021
9022       -spread <amount>
9023              displace image pixels by a random amount
9024
9025       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
9026
9027       -stroke <color>
9028              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
9029
9030       -strokewidth <value>
9031              set the stroke width
9032
9033       -swirl <degrees>
9034              swirl image pixels about the center
9035
9036       -texture <filename>
9037              name of texture to tile onto the image background
9038
9039       -threshold <value>{%}
9040              threshold the image
9041
9042       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9043              resize an image (quickly)
9044
9045       -tile <filename>
9046              tile image when filling a graphic primitive
9047
9048       -transform
9049              transform the image
9050
9051       -transparent <color>
9052              make this color transparent within the image
9053
9054       -treedepth <value>
9055              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
9056
9057       -trim  trim an image
9058
9059       -type <type>
9060              the image type
9061
9062       -units <type>
9063              the units of image resolution
9064
9065       -unsharp <radius>{x<sigma>}{+<amount>}{+<threshold>}
9066              sharpen the image with an unsharp mask operator
9067
9068       -verbose
9069              print detailed information about the image
9070
9071       -version
9072              print GraphicsMagick version string
9073
9074       -view <string>
9075              FlashPix viewing parameters
9076
9077       -virtual-pixel <method>
9078              specify contents of "virtual pixels"
9079
9080       -wave <amplitude>x<wavelength>
9081              alter an image along a sine wave
9082
9083       -white-point <x>,<y>
9084              chromaticity white point
9085
9086       -white-threshold red[,green][,blue][,opacity]
9087              pixels above the threshold become white
9088
9089              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
9090              above.
9091
9092

GM MONTAGE

9094       montage creates a composite image by combining several separate images.
9095       The  images are tiled on the composite image with the name of the image
9096       optionally appearing just below the individual tile.
9097
9098       The composite image is constructed in the following manner. First, each
9099       image  specified on the command line, except for the last, is scaled to
9100       fit the maximum tile size. The maximum tile size by default is 120x120.
9101       It  can  be  modified with the -geometry command line argument or X re‐
9102       source. See Options for more information on command line arguments. See
9103       X(1)  for  more information on X resources.  Note that the maximum tile
9104       size need not be a square.
9105
9106       Next the composite image is initialized with the color specified by the
9107       -background  command  line argument or X resource. The width and height
9108       of the composite image is determined by the title specified, the  maxi‐
9109       mum  tile  size, the number of tiles per row, the tile border width and
9110       height, the image border width, and the label  height.  The  number  of
9111       tiles  per  row  specifies how many images are to appear in each row of
9112       the composite image. The default is to have 5 tiles in each row  and  4
9113       tiles  in  each column of the composite.  A specific value is specified
9114       with -tile. The tile border width and  height,  and  the  image  border
9115       width  defaults  to the value of the X resource -borderwidth. It can be
9116       changed with the -borderwidth or -geometry command line argument  or  X
9117       resource.  The  label height is determined by the font you specify with
9118       the -font command line argument or X resource. If you do not specify  a
9119       font,  a  font  is  chosen that allows the name of the image to fit the
9120       maximum width of a tiled area.  The label colors is determined  by  the
9121       -background  and  -fill command line argument or X resource. Note, that
9122       if the background and pen colors are the same, labels will not appear.
9123
9124       Initially, the composite image title is placed at the  top  if  one  is
9125       specified  (refer to -fill). Next, each image is set onto the composite
9126       image, surrounded by its border color, with its name centered just  be‐
9127       low  it.  The  individual images are left-justified within the width of
9128       the tiled area.  The order of the images is the same as they appear  on
9129       the  command  line  unless  the images have a scene keyword. If a scene
9130       number is specified in each image, then the images are tiled  onto  the
9131       composite  in  the order of their scene number. Finally, the last argu‐
9132       ment on the command line is the name assigned to the  composite  image.
9133       By  default,  the image is written in the MIFF format and can be viewed
9134       or printed with display(1).
9135
9136
9137       Note, that if the number of tiles exceeds the default number of  20  (5
9138       per  row,  4  per column), more than one composite image is created. To
9139       ensure a single image is produced, use -tile to increase the number  of
9140       tiles to meet or exceed the number of input images.
9141
9142       Finally,  to  create one or more empty spaces in the sequence of tiles,
9143       use the "NULL:" image format.
9144
9145       Note, a composite MIFF image displayed to an X server with display  be‐
9146       haves  differently than other images. You can think of the composite as
9147       a visual image directory. Choose a particular tile of the composite and
9148       press a button to display it. See display(1) and miff(5)
9149

EXAMPLES

9151       To  create  a  montage  of  a cockatoo, a parrot, and a hummingbird and
9152       write it to a file called birds, use:
9153
9154           gm montage cockatoo.miff parrot.miff hummingbird.miff
9155                   birds.miff
9156
9157       To tile several bird images so that they are  at  most  256  pixels  in
9158       width  and  192 pixels in height, surrounded by a red border, and sepa‐
9159       rated by 10 pixels of background color, use:
9160
9161           gm montage -geometry 256x192+10+10 -bordercolor red
9162                   birds.* montage.miff
9163
9164       To create an unlabeled parrot image, 640 by 480 pixels, and  surrounded
9165       by a border of black, use:
9166
9167           gm montage -geometry 640x480 -bordercolor black
9168                   -label "" parrot.miff bird.miff
9169
9170       To create an image of an eagle with a textured background, use:
9171
9172           gm montage -texture bumps.jpg eagle.jpg eagle.png
9173
9174       To  join  several  GIF  images together without any extraneous graphics
9175       (e.g.  no label, no shadowing, no surrounding tile frame), use:
9176
9177           gm montage +frame +shadow +label -tile 5x1
9178                   -geometry 50x50+0+0 *.png joined.png
9179

OPTIONS

9181       Any option you specify on the command line remains in  effect  for  the
9182       group  of images following it, until the group is terminated by the ap‐
9183       pearance of any option or -noop.  For example, to  make  a  montage  of
9184       three  images,  the  first with 32 colors, the second with an unlimited
9185       number of colors, and the third with only 16 colors, use:
9186
9187
9188           gm montage -colors 32 cockatoo.1 -noop cockatoo.2
9189                    -colors 16 cockatoo.3 cockatoos.miff
9190
9191       For a more detailed description of each option, see Options, above.
9192
9193
9194       -adjoin
9195              join images into a single multi-image file
9196
9197       -affine <matrix>
9198              drawing transform matrix
9199
9200       -authenticate <string>
9201              decrypt image with this password
9202
9203       -background <color>
9204              the background color
9205
9206       -blue-primary <x>,<y>
9207              blue chromaticity primary point
9208
9209       -blur <radius>{x<sigma>}
9210              blur the image with a Gaussian operator
9211
9212       -bordercolor <color>
9213              the border color
9214
9215       -borderwidth <geometry>
9216              the border width
9217
9218       -chop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
9219              remove pixels from the interior of an image
9220
9221       -colors <value>
9222              preferred number of colors in the image
9223
9224       -colorspace <value>
9225              the type of colorspace
9226
9227       -comment <string>
9228              annotate an image with a comment
9229
9230       -compose <operator>
9231              the type of image composition
9232
9233       -compress <type>
9234              the type of image compression
9235
9236       -crop <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}
9237              preferred size and location of the cropped image
9238
9239       -debug <events>
9240              enable debug printout
9241
9242       -define <key>{=<value>},...
9243              add coder/decoder specific options
9244
9245       -density <width>x<height>
9246              horizontal and vertical resolution in pixels of the image
9247
9248       -depth <value>
9249              depth of the image
9250
9251       -display <host:display[.screen]>
9252              specifies the X server to contact
9253
9254       -dispose <method>
9255              GIF disposal method
9256
9257       -dither
9258              apply Floyd/Steinberg error diffusion to the image
9259
9260       -draw <string>
9261              annotate an image with one or more graphic primitives
9262
9263       -encoding <type>
9264              specify the text encoding
9265
9266       -endian <type>
9267              specify endianness (MSB, LSB, or Native) of image
9268
9269       -fill <color>
9270              color to use when filling a graphic primitive
9271
9272       -filter <type>
9273              use this type of filter when resizing an image
9274
9275       -font <name>
9276              use this font when annotating the image with text
9277
9278       -frame <width>x<height>+<outer bevel width>+<inner bevel width>
9279              surround the image with an ornamental border
9280
9281       -gamma <value>
9282              level of gamma correction
9283
9284       -geometry <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{@}{!}{^}{<}{>}
9285              Specify dimension, offset, and resize options.
9286
9287       -gravity <type>
9288              direction primitive  gravitates to when annotating the image.
9289
9290       -green-primary <x>,<y>
9291              green chromaticity primary point
9292
9293       -help  print usage instructions
9294
9295       -interlace <type>
9296              the type of interlacing scheme
9297
9298       -label <name>
9299              assign a label to an image
9300
9301       -limit <type> <value>
9302              Disk, File, Map, Memory, Pixels, Width, Height, Read, or Threads
9303              resource limit
9304
9305       -log <string>
9306              Specify format for debug log
9307
9308       -matte store matte channel if the image has one
9309
9310       -mattecolor <color>
9311              specify the color to be used with the -frame option
9312
9313       -mode <value>
9314              mode of operation
9315
9316       -monitor
9317              show progress indication
9318
9319       -monochrome
9320              transform the image to black and white
9321
9322       -noop  NOOP (no option)
9323
9324       -page <width>x<height>{+-}<x>{+-}<y>{%}{!}{<}{>}
9325              size and location of an image canvas
9326
9327       -pen <color>
9328              (This option has been replaced by the -fill option)
9329
9330       -pointsize <value>
9331              pointsize of the PostScript, X11, or TrueType font
9332
9333       -quality <value>
9334              JPEG/MIFF/PNG/TIFF compression level
9335
9336       -red-primary <x>,<y>
9337              red chromaticity primary point
9338
9339       -render
9340              render vector operations
9341
9342       -repage  <width>x<height>+xoff+yoff[!]
9343              Adjust image page offsets
9344
9345       -resize <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9346              resize an image
9347
9348       -rotate <degrees>{<}{>}
9349              rotate the image
9350
9351       -sampling-factor <horizontal_factor>x<vertical_factor>
9352              chroma subsampling factors
9353
9354       -scenes <value-value>
9355              range of image scene numbers to read
9356
9357       -shadow <radius>{x<sigma>}
9358              shadow the montage
9359
9360       -sharpen <radius>{x<sigma>}
9361              sharpen the image
9362
9363       -size <width>x<height>{+offset}
9364              width and height of the image
9365
9366       -strip remove all profiles and text attributes from the image
9367
9368       -stroke <color>
9369              color to use when stroking a graphic primitive
9370
9371       -strokewidth <value>
9372              set the stroke width
9373
9374       -texture <filename>
9375              name of texture to tile onto the image background
9376
9377       -thumbnail <width>x<height>{%}{@}{!}{<}{>}
9378              resize an image (quickly)
9379
9380       -tile <geometry>
9381              layout of images [montage]
9382
9383       -title <string>
9384              assign title to displayed image [animate, display, montage]
9385
9386       -transform
9387              transform the image
9388
9389       -transparent <color>
9390              make this color transparent within the image
9391
9392       -treedepth <value>
9393              tree depth for the color reduction algorithm
9394
9395       -trim  trim an image
9396
9397       -type <type>
9398              the image type
9399
9400       -verbose
9401              print detailed information about the image
9402
9403       -version
9404              print GraphicsMagick version string
9405
9406       -white-point <x>,<y>
9407              chromaticity white point
9408
9409              For  a  more  detailed  description of each option, see Options,
9410              above.
9411
9412

X RESOURCES

9414       Montage options can appear on the command line or in  your  X  resource
9415       file.  Options on the command line supersede values specified in your X
9416       resource file. See X(1) for more information on X resources.
9417
9418       All montage options have a corresponding X resource. In addition,  mon‐
9419       tage uses the following X resources:
9420
9421       background (class Background)
9422              background color
9423
9424              Specifies  the  preferred  color  to use for the composite image
9425              background.  The default is #ccc.
9426
9427       borderColor (class BorderColor)
9428              border color
9429
9430              Specifies the preferred color to use  for  the  composite  image
9431              border. The default is #ccc.
9432
9433       borderWidth (class BorderWidth)
9434              border width
9435
9436              Specifies the width in pixels of the composite image border. The
9437              default is 2.
9438
9439       font (class Font)
9440              font to use
9441
9442              Specifies the name of the preferred font to use when  displaying
9443              text  within the composite image. The default is 9x15, fixed, or
9444              5x8 determined by the composite image size.
9445
9446       matteColor (class MatteColor)
9447              color of the frame
9448
9449              Specify the color of an image frame. A 3D effect is achieved  by
9450              using  highlight  and shadow colors derived from this color. The
9451              default value is #697B8F.
9452
9453       pen (class Pen)
9454              text color
9455
9456              Specifies the preferred color to use for text within the compos‐
9457              ite image.  The default is black.
9458
9459       title (class Title)
9460              composite image title
9461
9462              This resource specifies the title to be placed at the top of the
9463              composite image. The default is not to place a title at the  top
9464              of the composite image.
9465

GM TIME

DESCRIPTION

9468       time  executes  an  arbitrary gm utility command (e.g. convert) and re‐
9469       ports the user and elapsed time.  This provides way to measure  command
9470       execution  times  similar  to the Unix ´time' command but in a portable
9471       and consistent way.
9472

EXAMPLES

9474       To obtain time information for the execution of a command:
9475
9476       % gm time convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm
9477       convert input.ppm -gaussian 0x2 output.ppm    22.60s user 0.00s system 2354% cpu 0.960 total
9478       Here is the interpretation of the above output:
9479
9480           user - the total user time consumed.
9481           system - the total system time consumed.
9482           total - the total elapsed time consumed.
9483
9484

OPTIONS

9486       The time command reqires no options other than the gm command  to  exe‐
9487       cute.
9488

GM VERSION

DESCRIPTION

9491       version  displays  the  software  release version, build quantum (pixel
9492       sample) depth, web site URL, copyright notice,  enabled  features  sup‐
9493       port,  configuration  parameters, and final build options used to build
9494       the software.  The available information depends on  how  the  software
9495       was configured and the host system.
9496

EXAMPLES

9498       To display the version information:
9499
9500         GraphicsMagick 1.3.37 2021-12-12 Q16 http://www.GraphicsMagick.org/
9501         Copyright (C) 2002-2021 GraphicsMagick Group.
9502         Additional copyrights and licenses apply to this software.
9503         See http://www.GraphicsMagick.org/www/Copyright.html for details.
9504         Feature Support:
9505           Native Thread Safe         yes
9506           Large Files (> 32 bit)     yes
9507           Large Memory (> 32 bit)    yes
9508           BZIP                       yes
9509           DPS                        no
9510           FlashPix                   no
9511           FreeType                   yes
9512           Ghostscript (Library)      no
9513           JBIG                       yes
9514           JPEG-2000                  yes
9515           JPEG                       yes
9516           Little CMS                 yes
9517           Loadable Modules           no
9518           Solaris mtmalloc           no
9519           Google perftools tcmalloc  no
9520           OpenMP                     yes (201511 "4.5")
9521           PNG                        yes
9522           TIFF                       yes
9523           TRIO                       no
9524           Solaris umem               no
9525           WebP                       yes
9526           WMF                        yes
9527           X11                        yes
9528           XML                        yes
9529           ZLIB                       yes
9530         Host type: x86_64-unknown-linux-gnu
9531         Configured using the command:
9532           ./configure  ...
9533         Final Build Parameters:
9534           CC       = ...
9535           CFLAGS   = ...
9536           CPPFLAGS = ...
9537           CXX      = ...
9538           CXXFLAGS = ...
9539           LDFLAGS  = ...
9540           LIBS     = ...
9541

OPTIONS

9543       The version command does not currently support any options.
9544
9545
9546
9547GraphicsMagick                    2022/03/11                             gm(1)
Impressum